Fostex TV Cables VM200 User Manual

-30

In pu ts an d Ou tpu ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

GAIN

EQ/LO-MID

-40

Mixer Fu n ction s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

-10

EQ EDIT

MIDI fu n ction s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

-20

FREQ

SOLO

Fou r-ban d Param etric EQ & EQ L i b rary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Mixer Con figu ration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

-30

-40

Wh y a Digital Mixer? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

-10

EQ EDIT

-20

l On -board E f fects Processor

s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Digital I/ O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

-10

EQ EDIT

A b ou t th e Display an d Graph ic User In ter f a ce . . . . . . . . . . 15

-20

Scen e Mem ory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

SOLO

MIDI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

-30

-40

-10

EQ EDIT

Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

-20

SOLO

+10

-30

-40

-10

-20

+10

-30

-40

AIR/

-10

GROUP

-20

METER

+10

CHANNEL/

-30

-40

MMC SEND

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Introducing the VM200

Welcom e to the VM200

Th an k you for pu rch asin g th e Fostex VM200 Digital Recordin g

Mixer.

Th e VM200 is an affordable program m able digital au dio m ixer th at

can be extrem ely u sefu l in n u m erou s au dio application s, in clu din g

sm aller -scale live sou n d rein forcem en t, as well as au dio an d video

post-produ ction . However, it is design ed prim arily for digital au dio

recordin g in a MIDI or project stu dio, especially if you are u sin g dig-

ital h ard disk or tape-based m u ltitrack recordin g tech n ologies su ch

as th e Fostex FD-8, VR-800, or oth er ADAT-com patible digital

recorders.

Using this Guide

Th is u ser’s gu ide in clu des th e followin g m ain section s:

Cha pter 1: Introducing the VM200 describes th e m ajor featu res an d

explain s h ow to in stall th e VM200.

Cha pter 2: Touring the VM200 takes you on a gu ided tou r of th e

m ixer’s in pu ts an d ou tpu ts, faders, con trols, bu tton s, an d LCD dis-

play elem en ts.

Cha pter 3: Getting Sta rted offers illu strated system exam ples an d

explain s h ow to con n ect an d tu rn on th e power to th e VM200, an d try

ou t a few featu res, su ch as th e EQ an d Effects processors.

Cha pter 4: Inputs describes th e available in pu t ch an n els an d dis-

cu sses pad switch es, trim con trols, ph ase in version , as well as m u t-

in g, pan n in g, grou pin g, an d rou tin g in pu t ch an n els.

Cha pter 5: EQ describes th e param etric equ alizer, th e EQ Library,

an d h ow to store, recall, an d edit EQ program s.

Cha pter 6: Monitoring describes th e m on itorin g an d soloin g capabili-

ties of th e VM200 an d explain s h ow to view variou s level m eters.

Cha pter 7: Outputs describes th e stereo bu ss ou tpu t, th e record bu ss

ou tpu t, th e AUX sen ds, an d h ow to m on itor, rou te, solo, an d m u te th e

bu ss ou ts.

Cha pter 8: Effects describes th e Effect Library, presets an d u ser pro-

gram s, an d h ow to apply an d rou te to an d from th e effect processors.

Cha pter 9: Scene Memories in trodu ces scen e m em ories an d explain s

h ow to store an d recall scen es, an d h ow to preven t speciﬁc param e-

ters from bein g u pdated by a recalled scen e m em ory.

Cha pter 10: Digita l I/ O discu sses th e VM200’s digital in pu ts an d ou t-

pu ts, in clu din g th e ADAT an d S/ P DIF digital con n ectors, word clock

m asters an d slaves, an d cascadin g m u ltiple VM200s.

Cha pter 11: MIDI describes th e Mu sical In stru m en t Digital In terface

(MIDI) fu n ction s of th e VM200.

Cha pter 12: Initia lizing explain s h ow to re-in itialize th e VM200.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Installing the VM200

Appendix A. Speciﬁca tions a nd Da ta provides tech n ical speciﬁcation s

an d oth er data, in clu din g a MIDI Program Ch an ge Assign table, a

Con trol Ch an ge Assign table, System Exclu sive m essages, etc.

Th e Index can h elp you locate speciﬁc in form ation qu ickly.

Installing the VM200

Locate th e VM200 on a level, stable su rface.

You can also m ou n t th e VM200 vertically in a rack u sin g th e Fostex

9910 option al rack m ou n t adapter. Rem ove th e six screws from th e

bottom of th e VM200, attach th e rack m ou n t adapter, th en rein stall

th e screws as sh own in th e illu stration below.

rack-mount adapter

3 screws per side

attach adapters

to sides of mixer

side view of

installed adapter

Refer to th e Preca utions for in form ation on appropriate location s an d

en viron m en ts for th e VM200.

Refer to “Gettin g Started” on page 43 an d “Ou tpu ts” on page 107 for

in form ation on con n ectin g th e VM200 to oth er com pon en ts.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Introducing the VM200

Feature Sum m ary

Th is section su m m arizes th e m ain featu res of th e VM200.

Audio Speciﬁcations

❑ 20-bit 64-tim es oversam plin g, delta sigm a m odu lation A/ D con -

verters

❑ 20-bit 128-tim es oversam plin g, delta sigm a m odu lation D/ A con -

verters

❑ 90dB or h igh er dyn am ic ran ge

❑ 20Hz to 20kHz, +1dB/ -3dB frequ en cy respon se

❑ in du stry stan dard 44.1K or 48K sam plin g rates

Inputs and Outputs

❑ 20 Ch an n el In pu ts

• Ch an n els 1 - 8: An alog In

• Ch an n els 9-16: ADAT In (20-bit)

• Ch an n els 17-20: Effect Retu rn (for in tern al effects on ly)

• Switch able balan ced XLR an d balan ced/ u n balan ced ph on e

jacks

• +48V ph an tom power su pport for XLR An alog In jacks 1-4

• Rou te S/ P DIF in pu t sign als to an y of 20 ch an n els

❑ 18 Ou tpu ts

• Stereo bu ss ou tpu t (ST BUSS OUT)

• Recordin g bu ss ou tpu t (REC BUSS OUT)

• 20-bit digital two-ch an n el ou tpu t (S/ P DIF OUT)

• 20-bit digital ADAT eigh t-ch an n el ou tpu t (ADAT OUT)

• Two au xiliary ou tpu ts (AUX SEND 1-2)

• ADD AUX fu n ction adds two au xiliary ou ts (AUX SENDS 3-4)

• Solo bu ss ou tpu ts post-fader listen (PFL) sign als from an y ch an -

n el or bu ss to th e Mon itor or Ph on es ou tpu ts.

❑ MIDI IN, MIDI OUT, an d MIDI THRU (bu ilt in to th e m ixer)

❑ Word Clock In an d Ou t

❑ An alog two-track in pu t jacks (2TRK IN) en able you to m on itor two

tracks with ou t affectin g th e m ix.

❑ 4 In sert jacks for extern al effects retu rn s

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mixer Functions

❑ Scen e Mem ory (u p to 100 scen es)

❑ 3 Preset Scen es (INIT, RECORDING, MIXDOWN)

❑ 60m m con tin u ou s m otorized faders

❑ Stopless rotary con trols

❑ 4-ban d param etric EQ for ch an n els 1-16

❑ Du al in tern al effects processors

❑ EQ Library with 50 Presets plu s 50 m em ory location s for cu stom -

ized EQ program s

❑ Effect Library featu rin g 50 Preset effect program s, an d m em ory

location s for 50 u ser -cu stom ized effect program s

❑ Th e ADAT DIRECT sen d fu n ction en ables you to assign in pu t ch an -

n el 1-8 sign als to ADAT 1-8 (an d tu rn an y ch an n el on or off).

❑ You can pair adjacen t (odd-even ) in pu t ch an n els.

❑ You can pair AUX SEND 1 an d 2, an d AUX SEND 3 an d 4.

❑ Th ree Fader grou ps (A, B, C)

❑ Th ree Mu te grou ps (A, B, C)

❑ Ch an n el Copy fu n ction copies param eter settin gs, in clu din g m u te

grou p an d fader grou p in form ation , from on e ch an n el to an oth er

❑ EQ Copy fu n ction copies EQ settin gs from on e ch an n el to an oth er.

❑ LED-segm en t m eter displays ST BUSS OUT level

❑ LCD m eter displays levels for 20 in pu t ch an n els or 18 ou tpu t ch an -

n els

❑ Two Solo m odes, PFL an d MIX-SOLO, en able you to m on itor sign als

pre-fader or post-fader

❑ Large 256x64 dot resolu tion LCD Display

MIDI functions

❑ You can u se Program Ch an ge m essages to recall scen es (Presets

an d User tables)

❑ You can u se Con trol Ch an ge m essages to con trol m ixer param eters

(Presets an d User tables)

❑ You can u se System Exclu sive m essages to con trol m ixer param e-

ters

❑ You can ou tpu t MIDI Mach in e Code (MMC) by pressin g keys on th e

con trol pan el

❑ MIDI Bu lk Du m p capability for data backu p an d tran sfer

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Introducing the VM200

Mixer Conﬁguration

Th e VM200 is equ ipped with a total of 20 an alog an d digital in pu ts:

eigh t an alog m on o in pu t ch an n els (1-8), fou r in tern al effects

retu rn s, an d an eigh t-ch an n el ADAT digital in pu t. A two-ch an n el

S/ P DIF digital in pu t sign al can be rou ted to an y of 20 ch an n els,

an d a two-track an alog in pu t (2TRK IN) is also provided.

Extern al effects sign als can be retu rn ed to th e VM200 via fou r

INSERT ph on e jacks.

In pu t ch an n els 1 th rou gh 8 featu re trim con trol atten u ators an d TRS

ph on e jack con n ectors. In pu t ch an n els 1 th rou gh 4 can also be

switch ed to +48V ph an tom -powered balan ced XLR-type con n ectors.

Two effects bu sses sen d sign als to th e two on -board effects proces-

sors. An Effects Library con tain s 50 h igh -qu ality preset effects pro-

gram s. Th e effects can be m odiﬁed an d stored in th e Effects Library

for fu tu re recall. Th e VM200 retu rn s th e effects sign als via ch an n els

17-20.

Th e VM200 featu res 18 ou tpu ts.

A stereo bu ss ou tpu ts th e stereo bu ss sign al; a record bu ss ou tpu ts

th e record bu ss sign al.

Th ere are two ﬁxed AUX Sen ds, an d two m ore can be added th rou gh

th e u se of an ADD AUX fu n ction (alth ou gh th e record bu ss is u n avail-

able wh en th e ADD AUX param eter is on ).

Digital ou tpu ts in clu de a 20-bit digital two-ch an n el ou tpu t (S/ P DIF

OUT), a 20-bit digital ADAT eigh t-ch an n el ou tpu t (ADAT OUT).

Mon itor an d h eadph on e ou tpu ts facilitate stereo m on itorin g via

speakers or h eadph on es.

A fou r -ban d param etric equ alizer is available for each in pu t ch an n el.

EQ program s can be stored in an d recalled from an on -board EQ

Library.

You can cascade m u ltiple VM200s togeth er to in crease th e n u m ber of

in pu t ch an n els.

Why a Digital Mixer?

On e of th e best th in gs abou t a digita l au dio m ixer is th at it is able to

com bin e au dio sign als from variou s sou rces with ou t in trodu cin g vir -

tu ally an y sign al degradation , distortion , crosstalk, or n oise.

Digital recordin g to tape or h ard disk-based system s is in creasin gly

popu lar. However, m an y of th ese sm all stu dios u se 4-, 8-, or 16-ch an -

n el a na log m ixers.

Th e VM200 Digital Recordin g Mixer en ables you to keep you r au dio

sign als in th e digital dom ain for both m ixin g a nd recordin g, resu ltin g

in n ew levels clarity an d qu ality in you r recordin gs.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Four-band Parametric EQ & EQ Library

Four-band Param etric EQ & EQ Library

Ch an n els 1 th rou gh 16 featu re a fou r -ban d param etric equ alizer

(EQ), with variable Gain , Frequ en cy, an d Q con trols.

Th e LO-MID an d HI-MID ban ds u se param etric EQ. Th e LO ban d can

fu n ction as an HPF, sh elvin g, or param etric EQ; th e HI ban d can fu n c-

tion as an LPF, sh elvin g, or param etric EQ.

An EQ Library can store u p to 100 EQ program s for fu tu re recall.

Dual On-board Effects Processors

Th e VM200 featu res two on -board stereo effects processors, EFF1

an d EFF2.

Th ese effects processors u tilize Fostex Advan ced Sign al Processin g

Tech n ology (ASP) to create h igh -qu ality am bien t reverbs, as well as

ch oru ses, delays, ﬂan gers, an d oth er effects an d com bin ation s.

ASP is an exclu sive n ew digital effect processin g tech n ology design ed

by Fostex th at excels at m axim izin g th e efﬁcien cy of digital sign al pro-

cessin g power. It ach ieves an overwh elm in gly h igh -den sity Early

Reﬂection sou n d an d sm ooth High Du m p respon se rate via a Har -

m on ic Feedback Algorith m , an d con du cts elaborate reverb sim u lation

u sin g High Den sity Logarith m ic Processin g tech n ology, wh ich elim i-

n ates m u tu al in terferen ce between in tegrated delay m odu les, redu c-

in g au dio im pu rities.

Digital I/ O

Th e VM200 featu res two types of digital in pu ts an d ou tpu ts: S/ P DIF

an d ADAT.

Th e S/ P DIF is a two-ch an n el digital I/ O com m on ly fou n d on con -

su m er CD players, com pu ter au dio cards, etc.

Th e ADAT IN an d ADAT OUT con n ectors allow a direct eigh t-ch an n el

con n ection to an y ADAT-com patible digital au dio recorder, su ch as

th e Fostex VR800 or th e Alesis ADAT series.

About the Display and Graphic User Interface

Th e LCD display featu res a resolu tion of 256-by-64 dots an d u tilizes

graph ic icon s to represen t faders, sen d levels, an d rotary con trol

kn obs.

Th e display also provides a graph ic EQ respon se cu rve an d n u m erical

readou ts of m ixer param eter settin gs.

Depen din g on th e ligh tin g in you r stu dio, you m ay wish to su pple-

m en t th e LCD Display with a goosen eck-type stu dio lam p or oth er

ligh t sou rce.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Introducing the VM200

Scene Mem ory

Th e VM200 en ables you to store virtu ally every m ixer param eter set-

tin g as part of a grou p sn apsh ot, or “scen e,” in th e Scen e Mem ory.

Th e Scen e Mem ory can store u p to 100 scen es, wh ich you can later

recall by sim ply pressin g a key on th e VM200, or by issu in g a rem ote

MIDI Program Ch an ge com m an d from a con n ected MIDI device.

Th e Scen e Mem ory store an d recall fu n ction s let you work on a m ix

u n til you are satisﬁed, th en store virtu ally all m ixer fader an d param -

eter settin gs for in stan tan eou s fu tu re recall.

In addition to th e scen e m em ory “slots” or “location s” for u ser pro-

gram s, th e VM200 featu res th ree preset scen es: In itMix, Recordin g,

an d Mix Down , wh ich are design ed for optim al perform an ce in com -

m on m ixin g situ ation s.

MIDI

MIDI con n ection s en able you to take advan tage of th e VM200’s ver -

satility. MIDI Program Ch an ge m essages can recall scen es from th e

VM200’s Scen e Mem ory. MIDI Con trol Ch an ge m essages an d Fostex

System Exclu sive m essages en able real-tim e param eter con trol.

To backu p an d tran sfer data between VM200s, you can u se System

Exclu sive Bu lk Du m p com m an ds.

If a MIDI-com patible recorder is con n ected to th e VM200, you can

con trol it rem otely via MMC (MIDI Mach in e Con trol). You can also

cascade VM200s via MIDI con n ection s.

Faders

Th e VM200 featu res eigh t 60m m con tin u ou s-th row faders an d on e

Master fader.

A ch an n el layerin g system en ables you to con trol u p to 20 ch an n els

u sin g on ly th e eigh t faders an d th e Master. Page Select keys specify

th e “active” ch an n el layer. You can select Ch an n els 1 - 8 An alog In ,

Ch an n els 9 - 16 ADAT In , or Ch an n els 17 - 20 Eff Rtn . Th e LCD Dis-

play will sh ow param eters speciﬁc to th e selected layer.

Th e VM200 featu res seven Fader m odes. In each m ode, th e Faders

fu n ction sligh tly differen tly, con trollin g variou s sen d an d retu rn lev-

els. Th e Fader m odes in clu de: Ch an n el, Eff1, Eff2, Au x1, Au x2, Au x3,

an d Au x4.

Th e m otorized faders m ove au tom atically wh en you recall a scen e

from Scen e Mem ory, if th e Motor param eter is tu rn ed on .

Th e faders can be grou ped in to on e of th ree grou ps, en ablin g you to

con trol th e grou p with a sin gle fader. Faders for paired ch an n els

m ove as on e.

Th e faders can fu n ction as MIDI con trollers if a MIDI device is con -

n ected to th e VM200 via th e MIDI ports.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAX

MIN

CHAPTER 2

Touring the VM200

EFF2

RECORDING MIXER

ORE

VM200

EFF EDIT

DIGIT

EFF1

EFF LIBRAR

RECALL

ORE

EQ ON

SELECTED EQ

EQ LIBRAR

-18

-24

REC BUSSSOLO

-36

-40

RECALL

ST BUSS/SOLO

About This Chapter

Th is ch apter takes you on a gu ided tou r of th e VM200, in trodu cin g

SOLO

EXIT

EQ/HI

GAIN

variou s com pon en ts of th e con trol su rface, in clu din g th e faders,

rotary con trols, th e Data Wh eel, an d oth er featu res.

EQ EDIT

17-20 EFF RTN

It also explain s th e operation s associated with each fu n ction key.

FREQ

SOLO

Th is ch apter th en discu sses th e in pu t an d ou tpu t con n ectors an d

EQ EDIT

switch es on th e rear pan el an d con clu des with a block diagram of

th e VM200.

SOLO

GAIN

EQ/HI-MID

-10

-20

EQ EDIT

ADA

AGE SELECT

-30

9-16

-40

FREQ

SOLO

+10

-60

Chapter Contents

-10

EQ EDIT

-20

Top Pan el Con trol Su rface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

SOLO

+10

-30

GAIN

EQ/LO-MID

-40

An a l og Con trol Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

-10

LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

EQ EDIT

-20

Data Wh eel an d Neigh borin g Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

FREQ

SOLO

-40

Fu n ction Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

-10

Setu p Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

EQ EDIT

-20

Cu rren t Scen e Statu s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

SOLO

-30

-40

Key Mode Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Fader Mode Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

EQ EDIT

-20

Selected EQ Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

SOLO

-30

-40

EQ Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Eff Edit Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

EQ EDIT

-20

Effect Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

SOLO

-30

-40

Rec Bu ss Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Scen e Mem ory Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Ch an n el Con trol Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

+10

-30

-40

Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

AIR/

EQ Section Rotary Con trols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

-10

GROUP

tion page (s ee “S etu p Section ” on page 23 ).

Rear Pan el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

METER

+10

CHANNEL/

-30

-40

Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

MMC SEND

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Touring the VM200

Top Panel Control Surface

Th e followin g illu stration sh ows th e top pan el con trol su rface of th e

VM200.

Each section of th e m ixer is discu ssed in th e followin g pages.

INPUT

MONITOR

PHONES

2TRK IN

PAD

26dB

TRIM

26dB

TRIM

GAIN

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-10

-50

-10

-50

-10

-50

-16

-60

-34

-10

-50

MIN

MAX

MIN

MAX

+10

METER

-3

-6

-9

-12

-18

-24

-36

-48

VM200

DIGITAL RECORDING MIXER

ST BUSS/SOLO

PAGE SELECT

1-8 ANALOG IN

9-16 ADAT IN

17-20 EFF RTN

SETUP

EQ/LO

GAIN

EQ/LO-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI

GAIN

SELECTED EQ

EFF EDIT

SYSTEM

MIDI

EFF1

EFF2

EQ ON

EQ LIBRARY

EFF LIBRARY

FREQ

PAN

FREQ

PAN

FREQ

CURRENT SCENE STATUS

RECALL

STORE

RECALL

STORE

PAN

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

KEY MODE

ROUTING/

PHASE

PAIR/

GROUP

REC BUSS

SOLO

SCENE MEMORY

RECALL STORE

SOLO

MMC SEND

CHANNEL/

METER

CH VIEW

FADER MODE

/-1

+1/

AUX1

AUX3

EFF1

AUX2

AUX4

EFF2

EXIT

DATA

+10

ADD.AUX

-10

-20

-10

-20

-30

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

ENTER

CHANNEL

-20

-40

-60

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

ANALOG IN

ADAT IN

EFF RTN

MASTER

An alog Con trol Section (page 19)

LCD Display (page 20)

Fu n ction Keys (page 22)

In pu t Ch an n el Con trol Section (page 32)

Rear Pan el (page 38)

Data Wh eel an d Neigh borin g Keys (page 21)

VM200 UserÕs Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Analog Control Section

INPUT

MONITOR

PHONES

2TRK IN

PAD

26dB

TRIM

26dB

TRIM

GAIN

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-10

-50

-10

-50

-10

-50

-16

-60

-34

-10

-50

MIN

MAX

MIN

MAX

+10

A/ B Input selectors

Th e VM200 featu res fou r A/ B In pu t selectors th at en able you to

select th e A or B in pu ts for in pu t ch an n els 1 th rou gh 4.

The A In pu ts are balanced XLR-type connectors for u se with m icro-

phones that featu re XLR-type plu gs, su ch as condenser m icrophones,

or oth er in pu t devices that requ ire XLR con nectors.

Th e B In pu ts are balan ced/ u n balan ced TRS (tip-rin g-sleeve) ph on e

con n ectors, for u se with dyn am ic m icroph on es an d oth er sou n d

sou rces th at requ ire ph on e jacks. (Th ese con n ectors will accept bal-

an ced or u n balan ced in pu ts.)

For m ore in form ation , see “In pu t Ch an n els 1–4” on page 60.

Th e A In pu ts are selected by defau lt (th e selector is n ot depressed).

Press th e A/ B In pu t Selector to select th e B in pu t.

PAD (26dB) sw itches

Th e fou r Pad switch es tu rn th e 26 dB in pu t pads on an d off for in pu t

ch an n els 1–4.

Wh en tu rn ed on , th e in pu t pads atten u ate th e sign al by 26 dB. Th is

h elps th e pream p h an dle “h ot” sign als.

For m ore in form ation , see “Pad Switch es (In pu t ch an n els 1–4)” on

page 63.

TRIM controls

Th e fou r Trim con trols (1–4) atten u ate th e gain of th e in pu t pream ps

in th e ran ge of +10 to -34 or -16 to -60 dB, depen din g on wh eth er or

n ot th e sign al is atten u ated by th e Pad 26dB switch . Th e oth er fou r

Trim con trols (5–8) atten u ate th e gain of th e in pu t pream ps in th e

ran ge of -10 to -50.

2TRK IN sw itch

Th e 2TRK IN switch en ables you to m on itor th e sign al in pu t to th e

2TRK IN con n ector on th e rear pan el. You can m on itor th is sign al

th rou gh MONITOR OUT or PHONES OUT. Th e sign al is u n affected by

m ixer settin gs.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Touring the VM200

Monitor Gain knob

Use th e Mon itor Gain kn ob to adju st th e Mon itor Ou t level.

Th e Mon itor Ou t jacks ou tpu t th e bu ss sign al you specify on th e

SETUP SYSTEM 1:CLOCK/ MON fu n ction page. (Th e defau lt is ST BUSS

OUT.)

Phones Gain knob

Use th e Ph on es Gain kn ob to adju st th e h eadph on e ou tpu t level.

LCD Display

METER

-3

-6

-9

-12

-18

-24

-36

-48

ST BUSS/SOLO

Contrast dial

Rotate th is dial left or righ t to adju st th e con trast of th e LCD Display

for m axim u m clarity.

LCD Display

Th e LCD Display h as a resolu tion of 256 x 64 dots. It displays variou s

param eters an d n u m erical valu es, an d u ses graph ic icon s to repre-

sen t faders, rotary con trols, pan position s, an d switch es.

For m ore in form ation , see “Readin g th e Display” on page 49.

Meters

Th e LCD Display featu res m eters for 20 in pu t ch an n els or 18 ou tpu t

ch an n els.

To th e righ t of th e LCD Display is a pair of n in e-segm en t LED m eters

for th e Left an d Righ t ch an n els of th e stereo bu ss sign als.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Data Wheel and Neighboring Keys

Th e Data Wh eel is located in th e lower -righ t corn er of th e VM200.

It en ables you to scroll th rou gh lists of program s in th e Effect an d EQ

Libraries. You can also u se th e Data Wh eel to m ove th e cu rsor left an d

righ t wh en n am in g a n ew effect or EQ program .

/-1

+1/

EXIT

DATA

Use your thumb or finger

to rotate the Data Wheel

ENTER

[</ -1] and [+1/ >] Keys

Th ese keys can step th rou gh scrollable lists, su ch as th e Effect

Library or EQ Library.

[ENTER] and [EXIT] Keys

You can u se th e [ENTER] key to execu te certain fu n ction s, su ch as

con ﬁrm in g n ew param eter valu es, writin g to m em ory, or in itializin g

th e VM200. You can also u se it to con ﬁrm n ew param eter settin gs.

In m an y cases, if you h old down th e [ENTER] key wh ile pressin g

an oth er key, th e VM200 displays th e key’s ﬁrst fu n ction page (as

opposed to th e m ost recen tly-displayed fu n ction page for th at key).

Pressin g th e [EXIT] key u su ally exits th e cu rren t operatin g m ode an d

displays th e CHANNEL EDIT fu n ction page.

Th e followin g table sh ows addition al [ENTER] key fu n ction s.

Press ENTER and...

Operation

Sets channel fader parameter in selected fader mode to Unity Gain.

Increases adjustment increment in EFF Edit or EQ Edit mode.

Rotary Controls

VM200 enters EQ Edit mode. (If already in EQ Edit mode, the

parameter being edited will be initialized after conﬁrmation.

EQ EDIT

SYSTEM

Displays the ﬁrst SYSTEM function page.

Displays the ﬁrst MIDI function page.

MIDI

CH VIEW

Displays the ﬁrst CH VIEW function page.

Displays the ﬁrst PAIR/GROUP function page.

Displays the ﬁrst ROUTING/PHASE function page.

Displays the ﬁrst CHANNEL/METER function page.

PAIR/GROUP

ROUTING/PHASE

CHANNEL/METER

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Touring the VM200

Function Keys

Th is section provides a brief tou r of th e VM200’s n u m erou s fu n ction

keys.

Wh en you press certain fu n ction keys, su ch as [SYSTEM] or [CURRENT

SCENE STATUS], th e VM200 displays a “fu n ction page” of in form ation

on th e LCD Display Pan el. Each fu n ction page con tain s param eters

th at you can set to con ﬁgu re an d con trol th e VM200.

Each time you press the [SYSTEM] key,

a subsequent function page is displayed.

SETUP

SYSTEM

MIDI

In m an y cases, repeatedly pressin g a fu n ction key displays addition al

pages of param eters. Th e sequ en ce of pages cycles arou n d to begin

again (i.e., page 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3...)

Oth er fu n ction keys, su ch as EFF1 in th e Fader Mode section , do n ot

directly display in form ation on th e LCD Display Pan el, bu t n everth e-

less con ﬁgu re or con trol th e VM200 in oth er ways.

Som e fu n ction keys are opaqu e grey. Oth ers are tran slu cen t an d

ﬁxed above an LED ligh t th at can ligh t u p or ﬂash to in dicate statu s

in form ation .

In gen eral, th e tran slu cen t fu n ction keys ﬂash to in dicate th at th ey

are available for selection . On ce selected, th ey rem ain lit.

Not e: Th e procedu res in th is m an u al offer specific steps th at you

can follow to accom plish certain tasks. Ph rases su ch as “press

th e fu n ction key twice” assu m e th e fu n ction page cycle always

begin s with th e first fu n ction page. Th is m ay n ot always be th e

case. If n ot, sim ply press th e key repeatedly u n til th e desired page

appears.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup Section

Th e Setu p section featu res two fu n ction keys: [SYSTEM] an d [MIDI].

Th e SYSTEM key displays fu n ction pages th at en able you to con ﬁgu re

th e VM200.

Th e [MIDI] key displays fu n ction pages th at en able you to in terface

th e VM200 to MIDI devices.

SETUP

SYSTEM

MIDI

[SYSTEM] Key

Th e [SYSTEM] key en ables you to con ﬁgu re th e VM200.

It displays a sequ en ce of six fu n ction pages on th e LCD Display if you

repeatedly press th e key.

SYSTEM Key

Function Pages

Includes parameters that enable you to...

1:CLOCK/ MON

Se le c t a syste m c lo c k, sp e c ify the b uss to m o nito r, se le c t a

so lo m o d e a nd ke y o p e ra tio n, turn the fa d e r m o to rs o n o r

o ff, a nd se t the Fra m e m o d e .

2:RCL SAFE

Sp e c ify p a ra m e te rs tha t yo u wa nt to re ma in unm o d iﬁe d

(no t up d a te d ) whe n yo u re c a ll a sc e ne fro m m e m o ry.

3:CH RCL SAFE

4:SOLO SAFE

5:POWER ON RCL

6:INITIALIZE

Sp e c ify c ha nne ls tha t yo u wa nt to re ma in unm o d iﬁe d (no t

up d a te d ) whe n yo u re c a ll a sc e ne fro m m e m o ry.

Sp e c ify c ha nne ls tha t yo u wa nt to se nd to the ST Buss in

M-So lo m o d e .

Sp e c ify whic h sc e ne the m ixe r sho uld re c a ll fro m m e m o ry

whe n yo u p owe r o n the VM200.

Re -initia lize the VM200, re se tting a ll p a ra m e te rs to fa c to ry

d e fa ult se tting s.

[MIDI] Key

Th e [MIDI] key en ables you to in terface th e VM200 with MIDI (Mu sical

In stru m en t Digital In terface) in stru m en ts an d devices.

Th e [MIDI] key also featu res six fu n ction pages, as su m m arized below:

MIDI Key

Function Pages

Includes parameters that enable you to...

1:MIDI TX&RX

Se t MIDI tra nsm it/ re c e ive c ha nne ls, se t MIDI m e ssa g e tra ns-

m issio n a nd re c e p tio n o n o r o ff.

2:PGM TABLE1

3:PGM TABLE2

4:CTL TABLE1

5:CTL TABLE2

6:BULK DUMP

Ed it Use r Pro g ra m Cha ng e Assig n ta b le 1.

Vie w Pro g ra m Cha ng e Assig n ta b le 2.

Ed it Use r Co ntro l Cha ng e Assig n ta b le 1.

Vie w Co ntro l Cha ng e Assig n ta b le 2.

Se t up Bulk Dum p tra nsm issio n.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Touring the VM200

Current Scene Status

Th e Cu rren t Scen e Statu s section featu res on ly on e key, wh ich

sh ares its n am e.

CURRENT SCENE STATUS

Wh en you press th e [CURRENT SCENE STATUS] key, th e VM200 en ters

Cu rren t Scen e Statu s m ode an d displays th e CURRENT SCENE STATUS

fu n ction page. Th e n u m ber an d n am e of th e scen e (e.g.,

01:MY_SCENE) appear in th e top righ t of th e display.

Th e CURRENT SCENE STATUS fu n ction page en ables you to:

• En able th e EQ for ch an n els 1-8, 9-16, or 1-16

• Tu rn on th e ADD. AUX param eter (to en able AUX Sen ds 3&4)

• Set th e Sm ooth in g fu n ction to Level 1 or 2

• Set th e record bu ss gain (REC-B.GAIN) from [∞ to -90 to 0dB]

(available wh en ADD. AUX is off)

• Set th e sen ds for AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, an d AUX4, EFF1, an d EFF2

to Pre-fader or Post-fader

• Pair AUX Sen ds (Au x1&2 or Au x3&4).

Key Mode Section

Th e Key Mode section featu res fou r fu n ction keys: [ROUT-

ING/ PHASE], [PAIR/ GROUP], [CH VIEW], an d [CHANNEL/ METER], as

described below.

KEY MODE

ROUTING/

PHASE

PAIR/

GROUP

MMC SEND

CHANNEL/

METER

CH VIEW

[ROUTING/ PHASE] Key

Th e [ROUTING/ PHASE] key displays a sequ en ce of th ree fu n ction

pages th at let you con trol m ixer rou tin g, assign S/ P DIF in pu ts to

ch an n els, an d in vert th e ph ase for each ch an n el.

Th e ROUTING fu n ction page lets you rou te in pu t ch an n els 1–20 to th e

Stereo Bu ss (ST BUS), th e Record Bu ss (REC BUS), or th e ADAT ou t-

pu t (DIRECT).

Press a Page Select key to specify Ch an n els 1-8, 9-16, or 17-20. Th en

press th e [EQ EDIT], [SOLO], an d/ or [ON] key for each ch an n el to rou te

th e sign al to a poten tial destin ation . Th e in dicator in th e ch an -

n el/ bu ss m atrix h igh ligh ts (dark squ are).

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

[PAIR/GROUP] Key

Th e S/ P DIF fu n ction page lets you assign th e S/ P DIF digital two-track

in pu t to an y odd-even pair of ch an n els (e.g., 1&2, 13&14, etc.).

Th e Ø PHASE fu n ction page lets you in vert th e ph ase for each of in pu t

ch an n els 1 th rou gh 20.

Press a Page Select key to specify Ch an n els 1-8, 9-16, or 17-20.

You can also u se th e [ROUTING/ PHASE] key in con ju n ction with th e

[PAIR/ GROUP] key to en ter MMC m ode. (For m ore in form ation , see

“MMC (MIDI Mach in e Con trol) Sen d” on page 192.)

ROUTING/PHASE Key

Function Pages

1:ROUTING

Includes parameters that enable you to...

Ro ute inp ut c ha nne ls 1-20 to ST BUSS, REC BUSS, o r ADAT

DIRECT.

2:S/ P DIF

Assig n S/ P DIF d ig ita l inp ut to a ny o d d -e ve n c ha nne l p a ir.

Inve rt p ha se fo r e a c h inp ut c ha nne l.

3:Ø PHASE

[PAIR/ GROUP] Key

Th e [PAIR/ GROUP] key displays a sequ en ce of three fu nction pages

that enable you to pair ch annels, m u te grou ps of channels, or grou p

faders u n der th e control of a single fader.

Th e CHANNEL PAIR (CH PAIR) fu n ction page en ables you to pair an y two

odd-even ch an n els u sin g th e [EQ EDIT] keys.

Th e MUTE GROUP fu n ction page en ables you to create th ree grou ps of

ch an n els (Mu te Grou ps A, B, an d C) th at you can silen ce in stan tly.

Th e FADER GROUP fu n ction page also en ables you to create th ree grou ps

of ch an n els (Fader Grou ps A, B, an d C). Faders in a grou p can be con -

trolled by a sin gle fader.

Use th e Page Select keys to specify Ch an n els 1-8, 9-16, or 17-20; u se

th e [EQ EDIT], [SOLO], an d [ON] keys to apply th ese fu n ction s to spe-

ciﬁc ch an n els.

You can also press th e [ROUTING/ PHASE] key sim u ltan eou sly with th e

[PAIR/ GROUP] key to en ter MMC m ode. (For m ore in form ation , see

“MMC (MIDI Mach in e Con trol) Sen d” on page 192.)

PAIR/GROUP Key

Function Pages

1:CH PAIR

Includes parameters that enable you to...

Pa ir o d d -e ve n inp ut c ha nne ls.

Cre a te Mute Gro up s A, B, C

Cre a te Fa d e r Gro up s A, B, C

2:MUTE GROUP

3:FADER GROUP

[CH VIEW] Key

Th e Ch an n el View [CH VIEW] key displays a sequ en ce of th ree fu n c-

tion pages th at display settin gs for speciﬁc ch an n els, an d allow you

to copy ch an n el an d EQ settin gs from a sou rce ch an n el to destin a-

tion ch an n els.

Th e CH VIEW fu n ction page lets you view (bu t n ot m odify) settin gs for

speciﬁc ch an n els.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Touring the VM200

Th e CH COPY fu n ction page lets you copy ch an n el settin gs from a

sou rce ch an n el to on e or m ore destin ation ch an n els.

Th e EQ COPY fu n ction page lets you copy EQ settin gs from a sou rce

ch an n el to on e or m ore destin ation ch an n els.

CH VIEW Key

Function Pages

1:CH VIEW

Includes parameters that enable you to...

Vie w c ha nne l p a ra m e te r se tting s.

Co p y c ha nne l se tting s to o the r c ha nne ls.

Co p y EQ se tting s to o the r c ha nne ls.

2:CH COPY

3:EQ COPY

[CHANNEL/ METER] Key

Pressin g th e [CHANNEL/ METER] key displays two CHANNEL EDIT fu n c-

tion pages: Ch an n el Edit/ In pu t an d Ch an n el Edit/ Ou tpu t.

Th ese are essen tially th e “m ain ” pages of th e VM200, th e pages you

will likely display m ost often . However, u n like oth er fu n ction pages,

th e n am e of th e page does n ot appear on a CHANNEL EDIT fu n ction

page.

Th e n am e an d n u m ber of th e Cu rren t Scen e appear in th e top-left

corn er of th e display.

Th ese fu n ction pages en able you to view an d set th e pan position for

each ch an n el.

You can also view th e input levels for in pu t ch an n els 1-20.

Pressin g th e [CHANNEL/ METER] key a secon d tim e displays th e output

levels for th e ADAT, AUX, Effects, Record Bu ss, an d Stereo Bu ss ou t-

pu ts.

CHANNEL/METER Key

Function Pages

Includes parameters that enable you to...

1:CH EDIT (Inp ut)

Vie w inp ut le ve ls a nd se t p a n p o sitio ns.

Vie w o utp ut le ve ls a nd se t p a n p o sitio ns.

2:CH EDIT (Outp ut)

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Fader Mode Section

FADER MODE

AUX1

AUX3

EFF1

AUX2

AUX4

EFF2

ADD.AUX

CHANNEL

Th e VM200 featu res 20 in pu t ch an n els an d 18 ou tpu t ch an n els.

However, with on ly eigh t faders plu s th e Master fader, th e VM200

m u st u se its faders for m u ltiple tasks to accom m odate all th ose

ch an n els.

Depen din g on th e Fader Mode, th e faders (as well as th e [ON], [SOLO],

an d [EQ EDIT] keys) con trol differen t fu n ction s. You determ in e wh ich

fu n ction s th e faders an d keys will con trol by selectin g a Fader Mode.

[AUX1], [AUX2], [AUX3], and [AUX4] Keys

If you press on e of th ese fu n ction keys, th e faders, th e Master fader,

[ON] an d [SOLO] keys con trol th e AUX sen d sign als. (To en able AUX3

an d AUX4 keys, tu rn on th e ADD. AUX param eter on th e CURRENT

SCENE STATUS fu n ction page. For m ore in form ation , see “En ablin g AUX

Sen ds 3 & 4 (ADD. AUX Param eter)” on page 115.)

[EFF1] and [EFF2] Keys

If you press on e of th ese fu n ction keys, th e faders, th e Master fader,

[ON] an d [SOLO] keys con trol th e EFF1 an d EFF2 sen d sign als.

[CHANNEL] Key

Th e [CHANNEL] key is som eth in g like a “Hom e” key. With th is key

selected, ch an n el con trols h an dle in pu t ch an n el sign als an d th e Mas-

ter con trols h an dle stereo ou t sign als.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Touring the VM200

Selected EQ Section

An equ alizer (EQ) en ables you to boost or cu t speciﬁc frequ en cy

ran ges to “sh ape” a sou n d.

Th e VM200 featu res a fou r -ban d param etric equ alizer for each in pu t

ch an n el. Each ban d featu res rotary con trols for Gain , Frequ en cy,

an d Q.

Th e LO-MID an d HI-MID ban ds u se param etric EQ. Th e LO ban d can

fu n ction as an HPF, sh elvin g, or param etric EQ; th e HI ban d can

fu n ction as an LPF, sh elvin g, or param etric EQ.

Th e Selected EQ section featu res th ree keys: an [EQ ON] key, an d

[STORE] an d [RECALL] keys for th e EQ Library.

For m ore in form ation on u sin g th e EQ, see EQ on page 75.

SELECTED EQ

EQ ON

EQ LIBRARY

RECALL

STORE

[EQ ON] Key

Th e [EQ ON] key en ables you to tu rn on or bypass th e equ alization

param eters selected via th e [EQ EDIT] keys.

EQ Library

Th e EQ Library stores sets of equ alization param eters as EQ pro-

gram s th at you can later recall.

Th e EQ Library featu res 50 preset EQ program s. You can store u p to

50 n ew EQ program s (in EQ Library location s 50 - 99).

[RECALL] Key

Pressin g th e [RECALL] key displays th e EQ LIBRARY RECALL fu n ction

page, wh ich en ables you to select from u p to 100 equ alization pro-

gram s (00 - 99).

Use th e Data Wh eel or [</ -1] an d [+1/ >] keys to scroll th rou gh th e list,

an d press th e [ENTER] key to recall th e selected EQ program .

Th e lower h alf of th e fu n ction page displays th e pan an d fader set-

tin gs for each ch an n el.

[STORE] Key

Th e [STORE] key en ables you to create an d store n ew EQ program s.

On ce you ’ve worked on a m ix, adju stin g th e Gain , Frequ en cy, an d Q

param eters to you r satisfaction for all fou r ban ds of each ch an n el,

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Eff Edit Section

you m ay wish to store th e EQ settin gs for fu tu re recall.

Pressin g th e [STORE] key displays th e EQ LIBRARY STORE fu n ction page.

Use th e Data Wh eel to scroll th rou gh th e list to select th e location

(program n u m ber) wh ere you wan t to store th e n ew EQ program .

Press th e [ENTER] key to display th e EQ LIBRARY NAME EDIT fu n ction

page, th en n am e th e EQ program .

Pressin g th e [ENTER] key again stores th e program in th e EQ Library

for fu tu re recall.

On e way to create a n ew EQ program is to select th e EQ program m ost

sim ilar to you r “target” EQ, th en m odify variou s param eters to scu lpt

th e respon se cu rve in to sh ape.

For m ore in form ation , see “Storin g EQ Program s” on page 86.

Eff Edit Section

Th e Eff Edit section featu res fou r keys: [EFF1], [EFF2], an d [STORE]

an d [RECALL] keys for th e Effect Library.

EFF EDIT

EFF1

EFF2

EFF LIBRARY

RECALL

STORE

[EFF1] and [EFF2] Keys

Th e [EFF1] an d [EFF2] keys in th e Eff Edit Section en able you to select

for editing th e effect th at is cu rren tly loaded in effect processor 1 or 2.

Not e: Do n ot con fu se th ese keys with th e keys in th e Fader Mode

section of th e sam e n am e.

Pressin g [EFF1] or [EFF2] displays an EFF EDIT fu n ction page th at

in clu des param eters related to th e cu rren t effect.

For exam ple, a Large Hall Reverb effect in clu des param eters for

Reverb Tim e, E/ R Balan ce, HPF, LPF, In itial Delay, PreDelay, Room

Size, etc. Th e 3D Ch oru s effect in clu des param eters for Depth , HPF,

an d LPF.

Effect Library

Th e Effect Library stores effects th at you can recall.

It featu res 50 preset effects an d effect com bin ation s. You can m odify

th e param eters for th ese existin g effects to create an d store an addi-

tion al 50 cu stom effect program s.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Touring the VM200

[RECALL] Key

Pressin g th e [RECALL] key displays th e EFFECT LIBRARY RECALL fu n ction

page, wh ich en ables you to select from 50 preset effects program s

(00 - 49).

Use the Data Wheel or [</ -1] and [+1/ >] keys to scroll throu gh the list

or to select a program. Press the [ENTER] key to recall the Effect pro-

gram.

[STORE] Key

Th e [STORE] key en ables you to store you r own Effect program s in

on e of 50 u ser program location s (program n u m bers 50 -99).

On ce you ’ve edited effect param eters to you r satisfaction , you m ay

wish to store th em for fu tu re recall.

Press th e [STORE] key to display th e EFFECT LIBRARY STORE fu n ction

page.

Use th e Data Wh eel or [</ -1] an d [+1/ >] keys to scroll th rou gh th e list

to select th e location (50–99) wh ere you wan t to store th e n ew effect

program .

Press th e [ENTER] key to display th e EFFECT LIBRARY NAME EDIT fu n ction

page, th en n am e th e effect program .

Pressin g th e [ENTER] key again stores th e program in th e Effect

Library for fu tu re recall.

On e way to create a n ew Effect program is to select th e Effect program

m ost sim ilar to you r “target” effect, th en m odify variou s param eters

to scu lpt th e effect in to sh ape.

For m ore in form ation , see “Effects” on page 123.

Rec Buss Section

Th e Rec Bu ss section featu res on ly th e [SOLO] fu n ction key.

Th e VM200 also featu res [SOLO] keys for each ch an n el an d th e Mas-

ter fader. For m ore in form ation on th e Rec Bu ss [SOLO] keys, see

“Soloin g th e REC BUSS OUT” on page 113.

Th e REC BUSS is en abled on ly wh en th e ADD. AUX param eter is

tu rn ed off. For m ore in form ation , see “En ablin g AUX Sen ds 3 & 4

(ADD. AUX Param eter)” on page 115.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

[SOLO] Key

REC BUSS

SOLO

Th e [SOLO] key in th e Rec Bu ss section en ables you to solo th e

Record Bu ss.

Scene Mem ory Section

SCENE MEMORY

RECALL

STORE

Th e Scen e Mem ory section in clu des [RECALL] an d [STORE] keys th at

en able you to recall scen es from m em ory an d store n ew scen es to

m em ory.

A “scen e” is a collection or “sn apsh ot” of virtu ally all th e param eter

settin gs of th e VM200 at a given poin t in tim e.

[RECALL] Key

Pressin g th e [RECALL] key displays th e SCENE MEMORY RECALL fu n ction

page.

You can u se th e Data Wh eel or [</ -1] an d [+1/ >] keys to scroll

th rou gh th e list of stored an d preset scen es.

Press th e [RECALL] key again to recall th e scen e from m em ory an d

rem ain in Scen e Mem ory m ode, or press th e [ENTER] key to recall th e

scen e an d exit Scen e Mem ory m ode.

[STORE] Key

Th e [STORE] key en ables you to store scen es in Scen e Mem ory.

Pressin g th e [STORE] key displays th e SCENE MEMORY STORE fu n ction

page.

Press th e [ENTER] key to display th e SCENE MEMORY NAME EDIT fu n ction

page, th en n am e th e n ew Scen e Mem ory. Press th e [ENTER] key again

to store th e scen e in m em ory.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Touring the VM200

Channel Control Section

Th e VM200 featu res n in e 60m m m otorized

faders.

EQ/LO

GAIN

Faders 1 th rou gh 8 are associated with

separate [ON], [SOLO], an d [EQ EDIT] keys.

(Th e Master fader featu res on ly [ON] an d

[SOLO] keys.)

FREQ

PAN

Faders 1 - 8 an d [ON], [SOLO], an d [EQ EDIT]

keys 1-8 typically con trol ch an n els 1

th rou gh 8. However, th ey can also con trol

ch an n els 9 th rou gh 16, an d 17 th rou gh 20,

depen din g on th e ch an n el layer you select

u sin g th e Page Select keys. (See th e “Fader

fu n ction ” table below.)

EQ EDIT

SOLO

Th e n in th fader is th e Master Fader.

Faders 1 - 8 an d [ON], [SOLO], an d [EQ EDIT]

keys also assign valu es to variou s fu n ction

page param eters.

You can also u se th e faders an d [ON],

[SOLO], an d [EQ EDIT] keys as MIDI con trol-

lers by settin g param eters on th e Con trol

Table fu n ction pages, wh ich are displayed

by th e Setu p [MIDI] fu n ction key.

+10

-10

-20

-10

-20

Faders

-30

-40

-30

-40

Th e faders con trol differen t fu n ction s

depen din g on th e Fader Mode you select.

You select a Fader Mode by pressin g on e of

th e keys in th e Fader Mode section of th e

con trol su rface. Th e VM200 featu res seven

fader m odes: Ch an n el, Au x 1, Au x2, Au x3,

Au x4, Eff1, an d Eff2. (For m ore in form a-

tion , see “[O N], [S O L O], & [E Q ED I T] Key s ”

on page 34.)

Faders 1 - 8 typically con trol th e ch an n el

gain ; th e Master Fader typically con trols

th e Stereo Bu ss Master gain .

However, in Fader Mode Au x1 for exam ple,

Fader 1 con trols th e ch an n el-to-Au x1 Sen d

gain . In Fader Mode Eff2, Fader 1 con trols

th e ch an n el-to-Eff2 Sen d gain , an d so on .

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Faders

Th e followin g table describes th e fu n ction of th e ch an n el faders an d

Master fader in each Fader Mode:

Fader function

Input Channel

1–8 (ANALOG IN) | 9–16 (ADAT IN) | 17–20 (EFF RTN)

Channel Gain

Master

Mode

CHANNEL

AUX1

AUX2

AUX3

AUX4

EFF1

ST BUSS Master Gain

AUX1 Send Master Gain

AUX2 Send Master Gain

AUX3 Send Master Gain

AUX4 Send Master Gain

EFF1 Send Master Gain

EFF2 Send Master Gain

Channel to AUX1 Send Gain

Channel to AUX2 Send Gain

Channel to AUX3 Send Gain

Channel to AUX4 Send Gain

Channel to EFF1 Send Gain

Channel to EFF2 Send Gain

EFF2

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Touring the VM200

EQ/LO

GAIN

[ON], [SOLO], & [EQ EDIT] Keys

Th e VM200 featu res eigh t sets of [ON],

[SOLO], an d [EQ EDIT] keys, on e set for each

ch an n el fader.

FREQ

Th e Master fader also featu res a [SOLO] key

an d an [ON] key.

PAN

EQ EDIT

Th e followin g paragraph s su m m arize th e

fu n ction s of th ese keys.

EQ Edit keys

SOLO

Solo keys

On keys

[ON] Keys

Th e [ON] keys basically tu rn ch an n els on an d

off.

In Ch an n el Fader Mode, th e ch an n el [ON]

keys tu rn ch an n els 1-8, 9-16, or 17-20 on or

off, depen din g on th e ch an n el layer you select

(u sin g th e Page Select keys).

+10

Th e Master [ON] key con trols variou s fu n c-

tion s depen din g on th e cu rren t Fader Mode.

In Fader Mode Au x1 for exam ple, [ON] key 1

tu rn s ch an n el 1 on an d off, an d th e Master

[ON] key tu rn s th e Au x1 Ou t on an d off. In

Fader Mode Eff2, On key 1 tu rn s ch an n el 1

on an d off, an d th e Master [ON] key tu rn s th e

Eff2 Master on an d off.

-10

-20

-10

-20

-30

-40

-30

-40

Th e [ON] keys can also tran sm it MMC com -

m an ds in MMC Sen d m ode. (For m ore in for -

m ation , see “MMC (MIDI Mach in e Con trol)

Sen d” on page 192.)

Th e followin g table describes th e fu n ction of

th e ch an n el an d Master [ON] keys in each

Fader Mode:

[ON] key function

Input Channel

Master

Mode

CHANNEL

AUX1

AUX2

AUX3

AUX4

EFF1

1–8 (ANALOG IN) 9–16 (ADAT IN) 17–20 (EFF RTN)

ST BUSS OUT ON/OFF

AUX1 OUT ON/OFF

AUX2 OUT ON/OFF

AUX3 OUT ON/OFF

AUX4 OUT ON/OFF

EFF1 Master ON/OFF

EFF2 Master ON/OFF

Channel ON/OFF

EFF2

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

[SOLO] Keys

Th e [SOLO] keys en able you to solo ch an n els for m on itorin g.

Th e Solo Mode param eter on th e SETUP:SYSTEM 1:CLOCK/ MON fu n ction

page determ in es h ow sign als from each ch an n el will solo. Th ey can

solo in dividu ally (PFL, or pre-fader listen ) or after bein g m ixed

togeth er post-fader (M-SOLO, or m ix solo).

In Ch an n el Fader Mode, th e [SOLO] keys solo ch an n els 1-20, depen d-

in g on th e ch an n el layer you select u sin g th e Page Select keys.

Th e [SOLO] keys con trol variou s fu n ction s depen din g on th e cu rren t

Fader Mode. In Fader Mode Au x1 for exam ple, [SOLO] key 1 solos

ch an n el 1, an d th e Master [SOLO] key solos th e AUX1 Bu ss. In Fader

Mode Eff2, [SOLO] key 1 solos ch an n el 1, an d th e Master [SOLO] key

solos th e Eff2 Sen d Master.

Th e followin g table describes th e fu n ction of th e Ch an n el an d Master

[SOLO] keys in each Fader Mode:

[SOLO] key function

Input Channel

Master

Mode

CHANNEL

AUX1

AUX2

AUX3

AUX4

EFF1

1–8 (ANALOG IN) 9–16 (ADAT IN) 17–20 (EFF RTN)

ST BUSS Solo

AUX1 Solo

AUX2 Solo

Channel Solo

AUX3 Solo

AUX4 Solo

EFF1 Send Solo

EFF2 Send Solo

EFF2

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Touring the VM200

[EQ EDIT] Keys

Th e [EQ EDIT] keys en able you to select ch an n els for param eter edit-

in g.

Wh en you press an [EQ EDIT] key, th e VM200 displays th e EQ EDIT

fu n ction page for th e selected ch an n el (for exam ple, EQ EDIT CH2).

Th is fu n ction page in clu des param eters th at con trol a fou r -ban d

param etric equ alizer. Th e ban ds are LO, LO-MID, HI-MID, an d HI.

You can adju st th e equ alization by rotatin g th e [GAIN], [FREQ], an d

[Q] con trols for each ban d.

For m ore in form ation , refer to th e table below, wh ich describes th e

fu n ction of th e [EQ EDIT] key in differen t Fader Modes.

[EQ EDIT] key function

Input Channel

Master

Mode

CHANNEL

AUX1

AUX2

AUX3

AUX4

EFF1

1–8 (ANALOG IN) 9–16 (ADAT IN)

17–20 (EFF RTN)

Edits EQ for

Channels 1–8

(Disabled if

EQ Enable for

Channels 1–8 is

turned OFF.)

Edits EQ for

Channels 9–16

(Disabled if

EQ Enable for

Channels 9–16 is

turned OFF.)

Disabled

N/A

EFF2

EQ Section Rotary Controls

Th e VM200 EQ section is h orizon tally su bdivided in to fou r section s:

EQ-LO, EQ/ LO-MID, EQ/ HI-MID, an d EQ HI.

EQ/LO

GAIN

EQ/LO-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI

GAIN

FREQ

PAN

FREQ

PAN

FREQ

PAN

FREQ

PAN

Each ban d featu res th ree kn obs labelled Gain , Freq, an d Q th at con -

trol th e param etric equ alizer in EQ Edit m ode.

Th e Gain rotary con trol sets th e gain of th e in pu t pream ps.

Th e Freq rotary con trol speciﬁes th e frequ en cy.

Th e Q rotary con trols adju st th e selectivity of a ﬁlter. A n arrow fre-

qu en cy ban d in dicates a h igh Q valu e; a wide frequ en cy ban d in di-

cates a low Q valu es. (In th e respon se cu rve, n otice h ow a bell-sh aped

cu rve grows wider as Q decreases.)

However, like m an y VM200 con trols, in oth er operation al m odes th e

EQ section kn obs serve m u ltiple pu rposes. For exam ple, in Ch an n el

Edit m ode, th e [FREQ] an d [Q] kn obs con trol th e ch an n els pan posi-

tion .

VM200 UserÕs Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Page Select Keys

Th e VM200 u ses a ch an n el-layer form at, in wh ich its n in e faders per -

form m u ltiple tasks to accom m odate 20 in pu t ch an n els.

You can im agin e th e VM200 as bein g divided in to th ree layers. Layer

1 provides access to Ch an n els 1 th rou gh 8, wh ich prim arily h an dle

th e an alog in pu ts. Layer 2 provides access to Ch an n els 9 th rou gh 16,

wh ich are u sed with ADAT-com patible system s. Layer 3 provides

access to Ch an n els 17-20, wh ich are u sed prim arily for effects

retu rn s.

You can u se th e Page Select keys to select an appropriate ch an n el

layer. Th e VM200 will display param eters appropriate for th e ch an n el

layer you specify.

PAGE SELECT

1-8 ANALOG IN

9-16 ADAT IN

17-20 EFF RTN

Wh en you press a Page Select key, it ligh ts u p, an d th e oth er two Page

Select keys rem ain dark or ﬂash in g.

Page Select Key

Channels Displayed

1-8 ANALOG IN

9-16 ADAT IN

17-20 EFF RTN

Channels 1 - 8 ANALOG IN

Channels 9 - 16 ADAT IN

Channels 17 - 20 EFFECT RETURN

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Touring the VM200

Rear Panel

All in pu ts an d ou tpu ts on th e VM200 are con ven ien tly located on

th e rear pan el. Th e followin g paragraph s brieﬂy describe each in pu t

an d ou tpu t.

PHONES

MONITOR OUT

2TRK IN

ST BUSS OUT

REC BUSS OUT

AUX SEND

INPUT

ADD.AUX SEND

CAUTION

WARNING:

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

OFF

SHOCK,DO NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT

TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

+48V

RISQUE

DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE

NE PAS OUVRIR.

AVIS:

AC IN

S/P DIF

ADAT

MIDI

OUT

WORD

OPTICAL

POWER

OUT

THRU

ON OFF

OUT

INSERT

PHONES

Con n ect a pair of stereo h eadph on es to th is stereo (TRS) ph on e jack.

Set th e ou tpu t level u sin g th e PHONES Gain kn ob on th e top pan el.

MONITOR OUT

Con n ect th is pair of RCA ph on o jacks to th e in pu ts on you r m on itor -

in g am pliﬁer.

Select th e m on itor sign al you wish to ou tpu t th rou gh th ese jacks

u sin g th e MON SEL param eter on th e SETUP:SYSTEM 1:CLOCK/ MON fu n c-

Set th e ou tpu t level u sin g th e MONITOR Gain kn ob on th e top pan el.

2TRK In

You can in pu t a two-track sign al, su ch as th e stereo ou tpu ts from a

m aster recorder, to th is pair of RCA ph on o jacks for con ﬁden ce m on -

itorin g.

Press th e 2TRK IN switch on th e top pan el to m on itor th e sign al.

ST BUSS OUT

Th e Stereo Bu ss Ou t (ST BUSS OUT) is a pair of u n balan ced

1/ 4-in ch ph on e jacks th at ou tpu ts th e left an d righ t ch an n els of th e

m ain stereo m ix.

REC BUSS OUT

Th e Rec Bu ss Ou t (REC BUSS OUT) is a pair of u n balan ced

1/ 4-in ch ph on e jacks th at ou tpu ts th e record bu ss.

Wh en th e ADD. AUX param eter is tu rn ed on , th e REC BUSS OUT

ou tpu ts Au x Sen ds 3 an d 4.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Rear Panel

AUX SEND

AUX SEND 1 an d 2 are a pair of u n balan ced 1/ 4-in ch ph on e jacks

th at can ou tpu t an au xiliary sign al to drive extern al effects, for

exam ple.

Inputs 1 - 4: XLR or Phone Connectors (A or B)

In pu t ch an n els 1 - 4 accept eith er balan ced XLR in pu ts (XLR-3-32

type), or balan ced/ u n balan ced (1/ 4-in ch ) ph on e plu gs. (In pu t 1-4

Ph on es con n ectors accept eith er balan ced or u n balan ced an alog

in pu t.)

If you are in sertin g a ph on e plu g, press th e A/ B switch for ch an n els

1 th rou gh 4 to select th e B in pu ts.

If you are in sertin g an XLR-type plu g, leave th e A/ B switch

“u n pressed” to select th e A in pu ts. You can switch ph an tom power to

th e XLR con n ectors on or off u sin g switch es located ben eath each

con n ector. (Man y con den ser m icroph on es, for exam ple, requ ire ph an -

tom power.)

Th ese in pu ts h ave a n om in al in pu t ran ge of -60 dB to +10 dB.

+48 Phantom Power

Tu rn on th is switch for XLR m icroph on es or devices con n ected to

XLR in pu ts th at requ ire ph an tom power.

Inputs 5 - 8: Phone Connectors

In pu t ch an n els 5 th rou gh 8 accept u n balan ced ph on e plu gs.

Th ese in pu ts are design ed for u se with lin e-level sou rces (e.g., a syn -

th esizer keyboards, effects processors, or oth er devices).

Th ese in pu ts h ave a n om in al in pu t ran ge of -60 dB to +10 dB.

Inserts 1-4: Phone Connectors

Th e In sert con n ectors are stereo-type ph on e jacks.

You can con n ect an extern al effects u n it to th ese con n ectors u sin g an

in sert cable to sen d th e sign al to th e effects u n it an d retu rn it to th e

VM200. (For m ore in form ation , see “In sert Ch an n els 1–4” on page 62.)

Th e In sert con n ectors allow you to in sert a sign al in to th e sign al ch ain

after th e PAD switch es an d TRIM kn obs.

AC In

In sert th e fem ale en d of th e AC power cable in to th is con n ector. Con -

n ect th e m ale en d to an AC electrical ou tlet of th e appropriate voltage

for you r area.

VM200 UserÕs Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Touring the VM200

Power Sw itch

Use th e power switch to tu rn th e VM200 on an d off.

S/ P DIF IN/ OUT

Th ese are S/ P DIF form at optical digital con n ectors. You can con -

n ect an y S/ P DIF equ ipped device (su ch as certain CD players, DAT

recorders, or com pu ter sou n dcards) to th ese con n ectors.

For m ore in form ation , see “S/ P DIF IN/ OUT” on page 168.

ADAT IN/ OUT

Th ese are Alesis ADAT Mu ltich an n el Optical Digital In terface con -

n ectors. You can con n ect an 8-track digital m u ltitrack recorder,

su ch as a Fostex VR-800 or oth er ADAT-com patible recorder, to

th ese con n ectors.

For m ore in form ation , see “ADAT IN/ OUT” on page 165.

MIDI IN, OUT,THRU

Th ese stan dard MIDI ports en able you to con n ect th e VM200 to

oth er MIDI devices. Th e MIDI IN port receives MIDI m essages. Th e

MIDI OUT port ou tpu ts MIDI m essages. Th e MIDI THRU port ou t-

pu ts all MIDI m essages received by th e MIDI IN port.

75Ω On, Off Sw itch

Th is switch tu rn s WORD IN term in ation on an d off. If th e VM200 is

th e last device to receive word clock via th e WORD IN con n ection ,

tu rn th is term in ation switch on .

WORD IN/ OUT

Th e Word In an d Ou t con n ectors are con n ected to th e WORD OUT

an d IN con n ectors of digital devices to receive an d sen d word clock

in form ation for digital syn c operation .

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Block Diagram

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Touring the VM200

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAX

MIN

CHAPTER 3

Getting Started

EFF2

RECORDING MIXER

ORE

VM200

EFF EDIT

DIGIT

EFF1

EFF LIBRAR

RECALL

ORE

EQ ON

SELECTED EQ

EQ LIBRAR

-18

-24

REC BUSSSOLO

-36

-40

RECALL

ST BUSS/SOLO

About This Chapter

Th is ch apter is design ed to h elp get you started qu ickly u sin g you r

SOLO

EXIT

EQ/HI

GAIN

VM200.

It explain s h ow to plu g in th e power cord, con n ect to an am pliﬁer,

EQ EDIT

17-20 EFF RTN

plu g in a m icroph on e or oth er sou rce, tu rn on th e VM200, adju st a

FREQ

SOLO

few con trols, try ou t som e EQ settin gs an d Effect presets, an d record

a stereo sign al to an extern al recorder.

EQ EDIT

However, please read th e Preca utions , “In trodu cin g th e VM200” on

SOLO

GAIN

EQ/HI-MID

-10

page 9 an d “Tou rin g th e VM200” on page 17 before you “get started.”

-20

EQ EDIT

ADA

AGE SELECT

-30

9-16

-40

FREQ

SOLO

+10

-60

-10

Chapter Contents

EQ EDIT

-20

SOLO

+10

-30

GAIN

EQ/LO-MID

-40

VM 2 00 System Exam ple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

-10

Con n ectin g th e Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

EQ EDIT

-20

Tu r n in g th e V M 2 00 On an d O f f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

FREQ

SOLO

A Few Tips on Usin g th e VM200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

-30

-40

-10

Ch an n el Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

EQ EDIT

-20

Keepin g It Digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

SOLO

An Im p ortan t Note A b ou t Word Clock In form ation . . . . . . . 48

-30

-40

Stopless Rotary Con trols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

EQ EDIT

-20

Lower an d Raise Faders to In itiate Sen ds . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

SOLO

-40

Readin g th e Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Fu n ction Page Param eter Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

EQ EDIT

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Lit & Fl a sh i n g L E D K eys

SOLO

Fin ally...Let ’s G et Started! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

-40

-10

-20

+10

-30

-40

AIR/

-10

GROUP

-20

METER

+10

CHANNEL/

-30

-40

MMC SEND

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting Started

VM200 System Exam ple

Th e followin g illu stration sh ows on e exam ple of a recordin g stu dio

based on th e VM200.

Monitor speakers

DAT

ADAT compatible

Monitor amplifier

Master recorder

Headphones

Guitar processor

Lead guitar

ANALOG IN

INPUT

MONITOR

PHONES

2TRK IN

PAD

26dB

TRIM

26dB

TRIM

GAIN

Guitar processor

Second guitar

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-10

-50

-10

-50

-10

-50

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-16

-10

-50

MIN

MAX

MIN

MAX

+10

METER

-3

-6

-9

-12

-18

-24

-36

-48

VM200

DIGITAL RECORDING MIXER

ST BUSS/SOLO

PAGE SELECT

1-8 ANALOG IN

9-16 ADAT IN

17-20 EFF RTN

SETUP

EQ/LO

GAIN

EQ/LO-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI

GAIN

SELECTED EQ

EFF EDIT

SYSTEM

MIDI

EFF1

EFF2

EQ ON

EQ LIBRARY

EFF LIBRARY

FREQ

PAN

FREQ

PAN

FREQ

CURRENT SCENE STATUS

RECALL

STORE

RECALL

STORE

PAN

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

KEY MODE

ROUTING/

PHASE

PAIR/

GROUP

REC BUSS

SOLO

SCENE MEMORY

RECALL STORE

SOLO

MMC SEND

CHANNEL/

METER

CH VIEW

Bass processor

Bass guitar

FADER MODE

/-1

+1/

AUX1

AUX3

EFF1

AUX2

AUX4

EFF2

EXIT

DATA

+10

ADD.AUX

-10

-20

-10

-20

-30

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

ENTER

CHANNEL

-20

-40

-60

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

ANALOG IN

ADAT IN

EFF RTN

MASTER

MIDI keyboard

Vocal

Chorus

MIDI

Interface

Drums

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Connecting the Power Cord

Warn in g: Tu rn off th e power to all connected electron ic equ ipm en t

before m akin g any connections to the VM200.

Use th e in clu ded power cord to con n ect th e VM200 to an appropriate

AC electrical ou tlet. In sert th e fem ale en d in to th e AC in pu t on th e

rear pan el of th e VM200. In sert th e m ale en d in to a wall ou tlet of an

appropriate voltage for you r area.

Turning the VM200 On and Off

Th e power bu tton is located on th e rear pan el of th e VM200 n ext to

th e AC power cable in pu t jack. Wh en you power on you r au dio com -

pon en ts, be certain to follow th is sequ en ce to preven t dam age to you r

equ ipm en t:

^1.Con n ect all in st ru m en t s an d sou n d sou rces, in clu din g k ey-

boards, dru m m ach in es, et c.

^2.Tu rn on t h e power t o all sou n d sou rces.

^3.Tu rn on t h e power t o t h e VM2 0 0 by depressin g t h e power bu t -

t on on t h e rear pan el.

Th e VM200 displays th e Fostex an d VM200 logos, th en th e CHAN-

NEL EDIT fu n ction page. (For m ore in form ation on th e CHANNEL EDIT

fu n ction page, see “Th e Ch a n n el Edit Fu n ction Page” on page 49.)

^4.Mak e su re t h e volu m e on you r m on it or am pliﬁ er is n ot set t oo

lou d, t h en t u rn on t h e power t o t h e m on it or am pliﬁ er.

Wh en you tu rn off th e power to th e VM200, be su re to follow th is

sequ en ce in reverse. (Th at is, ﬁrst tu rn off th e m on itor am pliﬁer, th en

th e VM200, th en th e sou n d sou rces.)

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting Started

A Few Tips on Using the VM200

If you h ave experien ce u sin g an alog au dio m ixers, a few th in gs abou t

th e VM200 Digital Recordin g Mixer m ay be n ew to you . Th is section

in trodu ces som e of th e advan tages of workin g with a digital m ixer.

Channel Layers

If a con ven tion al an alog m ixin g con sole h as 16 or 24 in pu t ch an n els,

it also likely h as16 or 24 faders, th e sam e n u m ber of [ON] keys an d

[SOLO] keys, etc. Each in pu t ch an n el is a com plete m odu le, with its

own dedicated set of in pu t con n ector, pream p, etc. Th is type of

design can work well, bu t is redu n dan t an d su bject to an alog n oise.

Th e VM200 is a digita l recordin g m ixer, an d does n ot con form to an a-

log recordin g con ven tion s.

Th e VM200 u ses an in n ovative “ch an n el layerin g” system th at

en ables you to con trol u p to 20 ch an n els u sin g on ly eigh t faders an d

on e Master Fader.

You press on e of th ree Page Select keys to specify th e active ch an n el

layer. Th e faders, rotary con trols, an d variou s keys th en con trol a

ch an n el on th e selected layer, an d th e LCD Display sh ows param eters

speciﬁc to th e selected layer.

For exam ple, Fader 1 can con trol in pu t ch an n els 1, 9, or 17 depen d-

in g on th e selected ch an n el layer. (It can also con trol variou s sen d lev-

els, depen din g on th e cu rren t m ixer rou tin g.)

You can select on e of th e followin g layers by pressin g th e appropriate

Page Select key:

• Ch an n els 1 - 8 An alog In

• Ch an n els 9 - 16 ADAT In

• Ch an n els 17 - 20 Eff Rtn

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Channel Layers

Th e followin g diagram illu strates th e th ree ch an n el layers of th e

VM200:

The [1–8 ANALOG IN] key is lit.

You can control channels 1–8.

17-20 EFF RTN

EQ/HI

GAIN

AGE SELECT IN

9-16 ADA

EQ/HI-MID

GAIN

FREQ

1-8 ANALOG

EQ/LO-MID

GAIN

EQ EDIT

SOLO

FREQ

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ/LO

GAIN

SOLO

EQ EDIT

FREQ

EQ EDIT

FREQ

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

+10

-10

+10

-10

-20

+10

-10

-30

-20

-40

+10

-10

-30

-20

The [9–16 ADAT IN] key is lit.

You can control channels 9–16.

-40

+10

-10

-30

-20

-40

+10

-10

-30

-20

-40

-10

-30

-20

-40

-10

-30

-20

-40

-30

-20

-40

17-20 EFF RTN

-30

EQ/HI

-40

GAIN

AGE SELECT

ADA

9-16

EQ/HI-MID

GAIN

FREQ

ANALOG IN

1-8

EQ/LO-MID

GAIN

EQ EDIT

FREQ

EQ EDIT

EQ/LO

GAIN

SOLO

EQ EDIT

FREQ

SOLO

EQ EDIT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ANALOG IN

-10

SOLO

EQ EDIT

FREQ

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

+10

-10

-20

+10

-10

-30

-20

-40

+10

-10

-30

-20

-40

+10

-10

-30

The [17–20 EFF RTN] key is lit.

You can control channels 17–20.

-20

-40

+10

-10

-30

-20

-40

-10

-30

-20

-40

-10

-30

-20

-40

-30

-20

-40

-30

-40

17-20 EFF RTN

EQ/HI

GAIN

AGE SELECT

ADA

9-16

EQ/HI-MID

GAIN

FREQ

ANALOG IN

1-8

EQ/LO-MID

GAIN

EQ EDIT

SOLO

FREQ

EQ EDIT

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

T IN

EQ/LO

GAIN

SOLO

EQ EDIT

FREQ

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

ADA

FREQ

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

+10

-10

+10

-10

-20

+10

-10

-30

-20

-40

+10

-10

-30

-20

-40

+10

-10

-30

-20

-40

+10

-10

-30

-20

-40

-10

-30

-20

-40

-10

-30

-20

-40

-30

-20

-40

-30

-40

17 18 19 20

EFF RTN

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting Started

Keeping It Digital

Man y h om e stu dios or project stu dios th ese days record to digital

au dio tape or h ard disk recordin g system s, bu t lackin g a digital

m ixer, th ey are forced to m ix tracks u sin g a con ven tion al an alog

m ixer. Th is can actu ally add color an d warm th to som e tracks, bu t

is likely to in trodu ce n oise in to th e sign al ch ain .

On ce an in stru m en t or sin ger’s voice h as been con verted to digital

au dio by an an alog-to-digital (A/ D) con verter, it is gen erally best to

leave th e recordin g in th e digital dom ain . Ru n n in g th e sign al back

an d forth th rou gh A/ D an d D/ A con verters, regardless of th e qu ality

of th e con verters, u n n ecessarily redu ces th e overall qu ality of th e sig-

n al, an d h en ce th e ﬁn al recordin g.

With th e VM200, you can record an d m ixdown en tirely in th e digital

dom ain . Th is m ay m ake a dram atic im provem en t in th e qu ality of

you r ﬁn al recordin gs.

An Im portant Note About Word Clock Inform ation

Before you can tran sfer digital au dio from on e device to an oth er, th e

digital au dio equ ipm en t m u st be word clock syn ch ron ized, or tim in g

problem s m ay resu lt.

For exam ple, if you are recordin g to an oth er digital device, su ch as an

ADAT, DAT, or digital m u ltitracker, you m u st syn ch ron ize all digital

com pon en ts in you r recordin g system to a com m on word clock

sou rce.

If th e VM200 is th e on ly digital com pon en t in you r recordin g system ,

you do n ot n eed to adju st an y word clock settin gs.

However, if you are u sin g oth er digital au dio com pon en ts, please refer

to “Digital Con n ection s, Word Clocks, an d Sam ple Rates” on

page 160 for m ore in form ation on syn ch ron izin g to a com m on word

clock sou rce.

Stopless Rotary Controls

Th e VM200 u ses th e 12 rotary con trols (also kn own as th e Gain ,

Freq, an d Q con trols) to adju st valu es for several differen t param e-

ters, depen din g on th e cu rren tly-selected fu n ction page.

Un like con ven tion al an alog con trol kn obs, th e rotary con trols on th e

VM200 are stopless; you can rotate th em righ t or left en dlessly.

In th is way, th e kn obs can m ore easily accom m odate a broad ran ge

of param eter valu es.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Lower and Raise Faders to Initiate Sends

If on occasion you th in k you h ave con ﬁgu red th e VM200 to sen d a

particu lar sign al to a bu ss, bu t you u n expectedly can n ot h ear th e

ou tpu t, try brin gin g th e fader down an d raisin g it back u p to th e

desired level to in itiate th e sen d.

Th is m ay seem u n u su al if you are u sed to an alog m ixers, bu t it is part

of th e ch an n el layer stru ctu re of th e VM200. Becau se th e faders can

con trol m u ltiple fu n ction s depen din g on th e displayed fu n ction page,

you m ay n eed to lower an d raise th e faders to set n ew levels wh en you

ch an ge Fader Modes.

For exam ple, after you set th e level of ch an n els 19 an d 20 for an effect

retu rn , if you wish to set th e effect sen d level on ch an n el 3, you m ay

n eed to lower th e Ch an n el 3 an d Master faders on ce, th en raise th em

to set th e desired level.

Reading the Display

Th e LCD Display featu res a resolu tion of 256 x 64 dots. It can dis-

play n u m erical param eter valu es, an d u ses graph ic icon s to repre-

sen t fader position s an d rotary con trol settin gs.

Th is section sh ows a few sam ple fu n ction pages an d explain s com m on

icon s an d in dicators.

The Channel Edit Function Page

Wh en ever you tu rn on th e power to th e VM200 or press th e

[CHANNEL/ METER] key or th e [EXIT] key, th e VM200 displays th e

CHANNEL EDIT fu n ction page.

Th ere are actu ally two version s of th e Ch an n el Edit page. On e version

sh ows th e in pu ts; th e oth er version sh ows th e ou tpu ts. (Th e Ch an n el

Edit/ In pu t version is sh own below.)

Wh en you see th is fu n ction page, th e VM200 is in Ch an n el Edit m ode.

You can th in k of th e CHANNEL EDIT fu n ction pages as a type of “h om e”

page.

scene program number

scene title

selected EQ

input channel meters

ADD.AUX or Rec Buss

channel number

master fader level

channel pan settings

channel fader levels

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting Started

Exam ples of Other Function Pages

Th e n am e of th e fu n ction page appears in th e u pper -left corn er.

Note h ow th e fader icon s look like little faders on th e followin g CHANNEL

VIEW (CH VIEW) fu n ction page.

Function Page Name

Level indicator

Fader icons show

fader position.

You u se th e [EQ EDIT], [SOLO], an d [ON] keys to toggle two-state in di-

cators. Th ese in dicators are represen ted on th e display by sm all rect-

an gles.

An em pty rectan gle in dicates th at th e param eter or option is tu rn ed

“off.” A “ﬁlled” or solid dark rectan gle in dicates an “on ” settin g. (Th is

m an u al also refers to darken ed in dicators as “h igh ligh ted,” ju st to

con fu se th e tou rists.)

Empty rectangle means “off”

Filled or dark rectangle means “on”

Function Page Param eter Matrix

Th e display frequ en tly arran ges th e param eters on a fu n ction page

in a m atrix.

On e su ch m atrix displays fou r rectan gles in a h orizon tal row, with

each rectan gle con tain in g a param eter. Ben eath th is appears an oth er

row, wh ich con tain s eigh t rectan gles, as illu strated below.

On su ch a fu n ction page, th e fou r Gain rotary con trols adju st param -

eters in th e top row, an d th e Freq an d Q rotary con trols adju st th e

param eters in th e bottom row.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Lit & Flashing LED Keys

EQ/LO

GAIN

EQ/LO-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI

GAIN

FREQ

PAN

FREQ

PAN

FREQ

PAN

FREQ

PAN

For example, use the EQ/LO Gain rotary control

to turn the CH FADER parameter on and off.

Use the EQ/HI-MID Freq rotary control

to turn the EFF1 parameter on and off.

Lit & Flashing LED Keys

Man y of th e keys on th e con trol su rface of th e VM200 are tran slu -

cen t an d ﬁxed in position over an LED ligh t th at can provide statu s

in form ation .

In gen eral, th ese keys ﬂash wh en th ey are available for selection , an d

ligh t u p con tin u ou sly wh en th ey are selected. (Don ’t be alarm ed th e

ﬁrst tim e you press th e Rou tin g fu n ction key an d a cou ple dozen

ligh ts start ﬂash in g! Th is is n orm al.)

LED Condition Meaning

dark

ﬂashing

lit

off, deselected

available for selection

on, selected

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting Started

Finally...Let’s Get Started!

Th e followin g procedu re lets you try ou t som e of th e capabilities of

you r VM200. To sim plify th e explan ation , in th is procedu re we will

con n ect a m icroph on e to ch an n el 1, adju st th e EQ, apply effects, an d

record th e sign al.

Making Connections

Th is procedu re assu m es th at you h ave in stalled an d powered on th e

VM200. (See page 45 for m ore in form a t i on .)

^1.Con n ect a m icroph on e, in st ru m en t , or ot h er sou n d sou rce t o

in pu t ch an n el 1 .

You can con n ect eith er:

• a balan ced XLR-type con den ser m icroph on e to in pu t ch an n el 1,

con n ector A, an d leave th e In pu t A/ B selector bu tton on th e top

pan el u n pressed; or

• a balan ced/ u n balan ced TRS-type m icroph on e to in pu t ch an n el

1, con n ector B, an d depress th e In pu t A/ B selector bu tton .

However, you can u se an oth er sou n d sou rce, su ch as a syn th e-

sizer keyboard or CD player, if you desire. Make su re it is powered

off before you con n ect it to th e VM200.

INPUT

XLR-type connector (A)

OFF

+48V

1/4” phone connector (B)

INSERT

^2.Con n ect t h e VM2 0 0 MONITOR OUT t o an am pliﬁ er an d

speak ers, or con n ect a pair of st ereo h eadph on es t o t h e

PHONES jack .

You can u se th e Mon itor Gain or Ph on es Gain kn obs to adju st th e

ou tpu t volu m e level. Lower th e Gain to m in im u m to preven t lou d

n oise.

MONITOR OUT

PHONES

MONITOR OUT

2TRK IN

ST BUSS OUT

REC BUSS OUT

AUX SEND

ADD.AUX SEND

^3.Con n ect t h e ST BUSS OUT t o t h e an alog in pu t s of a recorder.

Even th ou gh th e VM200 is a digital m ixer design ed prim arily for

u se with digital m u ltitrack recorders, to sim plify th is brief proce-

du re, we will con n ect to an an alog recorder.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Powering On

If you prefer, you can con n ect a DAT to th e S/ P DIF OUT or an

ADAT-com patible recorder to th e ADAT OUT con n ectors. (For

m ore in form ation , see “Digital Con n ection s” on page 159.).

If you ju st wan t to try ou t th e EQ an d som e effects, you can skip

th is step (step 3) altogeth er.

^4.Lower all faders an d Gain an d Trim k n obs on t h e VM2 0 0 .

Powering On

^5.Press t h e Power bu t t on on t h e rear pan el t o t u rn on t h e power

t o t h e VM2 0 0 .

Th e VM200 ban n er scrolls, all keys ﬂash , th en th e VM200 dis-

plays th e CHANNEL EDIT/ INPUT fu n ction page.

Th e [1–8 ANALOG IN] Page Select key ligh ts u p red. All [ON] keys,

th e [CHANNEL/ METER] key, an d th e [CHANNEL] key ligh t u p green .

^6.Tu rn on t h e m icroph on e (or ot h er con n ect ed sou n d sou rce),

t h en t u rn on t h e power t o t h e am pliﬁ er.

If you are u sin g an XLR-type con den ser m icroph on e con n ected to

th e XLR in pu t, tu rn on th e +48 ph an tom power to th e m icroph on e

u sin g th e ph an tom power switch on th e rear pan el.

Adjusting the Channel Input

Make su re th at th e [ON] keys for ch an n el 1 an d Master are lit. If n ot,

press th e [ON] keys to tu rn th em on .

Also, m ake su re th at th e 2TRK IN bu tton is NOT depressed.

^7.Wh ile t alk in g or sin gin g in t o t h e m icroph on e (or playin g an

alt ern at e sou n d sou rce), adju st t h e ch an n el 1 Trim con t rol,

an d raise t h e ch an n el 1 fader an d t h e Mast er fader.

Notice th e m ovem en t in th e level m eter for in pu t ch an n el 1 on th e

LCD Display, an d in th e ST BUSS LED m eter to th e righ t of th e

display.

Adju st th e in pu t ch an n el level so th at th e m eter will n ot reach th e

“OL” (overload) level.

^8.Raise t h e m on it orin g level u sin g t h e Mon it or Gain con t rol for

con n ect ed m on it orin g speak ers, or t h e Ph on es Gain con t rol

for con n ect ed h eadph on es.

Set th is to th e desired listen in g level.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting Started

Adjusting the EQ

^9.Press t h e ch an n el 1 [EQ EDIT] k ey.

Th e [EQ EDIT] key ligh ts u p oran ge, an d th e [EQ ON] key in th e

Selected EQ section ligh ts u p green .

If th e [EQ ON] key is n ot lit, press th e key to tu rn it on .

Th e followin g EQ EDIT fu n ction page appears.

^10.Use t h e EQ Gain , Freq, an d Q rot ary con t rols t o adju st t h e

ch an n el 1 EQ.

Each trio of rotary con trols adju sts th e EQ in a separate fre-

qu en cy ban d. Use all 12 rotary con trols to adju st th e ch an n el 1

EQ in each of th e fou r ban ds.

For exam ple, watch th e respon se cu rve swell as you raise th e

EQ/ HI-MID Gain , as illu strated in ﬁgu res A an d B below.

the response curve swells when Gain is raised

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjusting the EQ

If you lower th e Freq, th e soft bell-sh aped cu rve in Figu re B wou ld

m ove to th e left, as illu strated in Figu re C:

In Figu res D an d E below, n otice h ow th e frequ en cy ran ge ch an ges

an d th e respon se cu rve sh arpen s an d n arrows as th e EQ/ HI-MID

Q valu e is raised.

You can store EQ settin gs in a program , or you can recall a preset

EQ program . Refer to “EQ” on page 75 for m ore in form ation .

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting Started

Audition Som e Effects

Let’s apply som e effects from th e Eff2 effect processor to th e sign al.

^11.Press t h e [EFF2 ] k ey in t h e Eff Edit sect ion .

Th e [EFF2] key ligh ts u p oran ge an d th e VM200 displays th e EFF

EDIT fu n ction page.

^12.Press t h e [RECALL] k ey in t h e Eff Library sect ion .

Th e VM200 displays th e followin g EFFECT LIBRARY RECALL fu n ction

page, an d th e [EFF2] key ﬂash es.

^13.Use t h e Dat a Wh eel or t h e [>/ -1 ] an d [+1 / <] k eys t o scroll or

st ep t h rou gh t h e effect s list an d select an effect program .

Try som eth in g like th e Mon o Delay or a Large Hall Reverb.

^14.Press t h e [ENTER] k ey t o con ﬁ rm t h e select ion .

Th e VM200 displays th e EFF EDIT fu n ction page.

^15.Press t h e [CHANNEL/ METER] k ey.

Th e VM200 displays th e CHANNEL EDIT fu n ction page.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Recording

^16.Press t h e [1 7 –2 0 EFF RTN] Page Select k ey.

Th e [1–8 ANALOG IN] key LED tu rn s off an d th e [17–20 EFF RTN] key

ligh ts u p red.

17. Mak e su re t h at t h e [ON] k eys for ch an n els 1 9 an d 2 0 are lit ,

an d lower t h en raise t h e faders for ch an n els 1 9 an d 2 0 t o set

t h e effect s ret u rn ch an n el level.

You m u st lower th en raise th e faders to set th e retu rn level.

EFF1 is rou ted to EFF RTN 17 an d 18, an d EFF2 is rou ted to EFF

RTN 19 an d 20.

18. Mak e su re t h at t h e Mast er [ON] k ey is lit , t h en raise t h e Mas-

t er fader t o set t h e effect s ret u rn m ast er level.

19. Press t h e [1 –8 ANALOG IN] Page Select k ey.

Th e [17–20 EFF RTN] key LED tu rn s off an d th e [1–8 ANALOG IN]

Page Select key ligh ts u p.

20. Press t h e [EFF2 ] k ey in t h e Fader Mode sect ion .

Th e [EFF2] key ﬂash es oran ge an d th e [AUX2] key ﬂash es red in th e

Fader Mode section . (Don ’t worry abou t th e ﬂash in g [AUX2] key for

th e m om en t.)

21. Lower t h en raise t h e ch an n el 1 fader an d t h e Mast er fader t o

set t h e desired effect s sen d sign al level.

As you raise th e faders, you sh ou ld h ear th e effect.

You can also edit an d store effects settin gs. Refer to “Effects” on

page 123 for m ore in form ation .

Of cou rse, you can con n ect oth er in stru m en ts to oth er an alog ch an -

n els, or con n ect a DAT or CD player to th e S/ P DIF In con n ector for

m ixdown an d recordin g.

Recording

22. Set u p you r con n ect ed recorder accordin gly an d press t h e

REC an d PLAY bu t t on on t h e recorder t o begin recordin g.

You can n ow record you r perform an ce to th e recorder.

To ch eck th e in pu t an d ou tpu t levels of th e VM200, press th e

[CHANNEL/ METER] key to toggle between th e in pu t an d ou tpu t

m eters.

Storing a Mix Scene

On ce you are satisﬁed with th e m ix settin gs, you can save th em as a

scen e “sn apsh ot” in th e VM200’s Scen e Mem ory. You can also recall

an d edit th ese scen es later. Please refer to “Scen e Mem ory” on

page 147 for m ore in form ation .

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting Started

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAX

MIN

CHAPTER 4

Input Channels

EFF2

RECORDING MIXER

ORE

VM200

EFF EDIT

DIGIT

EFF1

EFF LIBRAR

RECALL

ORE

EQ ON

SELECTED EQ

EQ LIBRAR

-18

-24

REC BUSSSOLO

-36

-40

RECALL

ST BUSS/SOLO

About This Chapter

Th is ch apter provides an overview of th e VM200’s in pu t ch an n els,

SOLO

EXIT

EQ/HI

GAIN

in clu din g ph an tom power, rou tin g, pairin g, grou pin g, copyin g

ch an n el settin gs, an d m ore.

EQ EDIT

17-20 EFF RTN

FREQ

SOLO

EQ EDIT

Chapter Contents

SOLO

GAIN

EQ/HI-MID

-10

In pu t Ch an n els 1–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

-20

EQ EDIT

ADA

AGE SELECT

In pu t Ch an n els 5–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

-30

9-16

-40

FREQ

SOLO

+10

In pu t Ch an n els 9–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

-60

In pu t Ch an n els 17–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

-10

EQ EDIT

In sert Ch an n els 1–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

-20

SOLO

+10

-30

Pad Switch es (In pu t ch an n els 1–4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

GAIN

EQ/LO-MID

-40

TRIM Con trols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

-10

EQ EDIT

In vertin g th e In pu t Ph ase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

-20

FREQ

SOLO

tin g In pu t Ch an n els . . . . . .

In pu t Ch an n el EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

-30

-40

Mu tin g Ch an n els . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

-10

EQ EDIT

Settin g Ch an n el Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

-20

Rou

SOLO

Rou tin g In pu t Ch an n els . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

-30

-40

-10

EQ EDIT

Mon itorin g an d Soloin g In pu t Ch an n els . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

-20

Feedin g Ou tpu ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

SOLO

Grou pin g Mu te Ch an n els . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

-30

-40

Pairin g Ch an n els . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

-10

EQ EDIT

-20

Grou pin g Faders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

SOLO

Copyin g Ch an n el Settin gs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

-30

-40

Viewin g In p u t Ch an n el Settin gs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

-10

-20

+10

-30

-40

AIR/

-10

GROUP

-20

METER

+10

CHANNEL/

-30

-40

MMC SEND

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Input Channels

Input Channels 1–4

Th ere are two sets of an alog con n ectors for In pu t Ch an n els 1 - 4.

Th e “A” set accepts XLR-type in pu ts (balan ced); th e “B” set accepts

ph on e jacks (balan ced or u n balan ced).

Th e XLR con n ectors are XLR-3-32-type in pu ts. Th e ph on e jacks are

1/ 4-in ch TRS-type.

Both XLR an d ph on e jack in pu ts accept a n om in al in pu t ran ge of

–60 dB to +10 dB.

INPUT

XLR inputs

phantom power switch

OFF

+48V

phone jack inputs

inserts

INSERT

Not e: Before you set th e INPUT A/ B switch for in pu t ch an n els 1-4, lower

th e correspon din g TRIM control to th e m in im u m , or you will h ear a clickin g

n oise.

Not e: Before you tu rn on ph an tom power, lower th e TRIM control for th e

correspon din g in pu t ch an n el to th e m inim u m , or tu rn off th e power to th e

VM200.

Not e: Tu rn off th e correspon din g ph an tom power switch before you con n ect

a dynam ic m icroph on e; oth erwise, you m ay dam age th e m icroph on e. If you

tu rn on th e power to the VM200 wh ile th e in pu t ch an n el’s ph an tom power

switch is tu rn ed on , th e VM200 displays a warn in g m essage: “Warn in g! +48V

SW ON!”

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Phantom Power for Input Channels 1–4

Th e VM200 su pplies option al ph an tom power (+48 V) to th e XLR con -

n ectors. You can tu rn th e ph an tom power on or off u sin g th e switch es

on th e rear pan el as sh own in th e ﬁgu re above.

Caut ion : Tu rn on the phantom power only after you connect a balanced XLR

com ponent (su ch as a condenser m icrophone) to the XLR inpu t connector.

Specify th e con n ector you wish to u se by pressin g (or n ot pressin g) th e

A/ B in pu t selectors on th e top pan el (sh own in th e ﬁgu re below). Th e

A settin g (u n pressed) selects th e XLR in pu t con n ector; th e B settin g

(depressed) selects th e ph on e jack in pu t con n ector.

INPUT 1

INPUT 2

INPUT 3

INPUT 4

A/B Input selector

PAD

26dB

PAD

26dB

PAD

26dB

PAD

26dB

TRIM

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

+10

Input Channels 5–8

In pu t ch an n els 5–8 accept on ly u n balan ced ph on e jacks. (Th ese con -

n ectors do n ot accept XLR in pu ts or balan ced an alog in pu ts.)

For m ore in form ation , see “Rear Pan el” on page 38.

Input Channels 9–16

In addition to th e an alog sign als you can in pu t to ch an n els 1

th rou gh 8, you can assign digital ADAT in pu ts to ch an n els 9-16.

Refer to “Digital Con n ection s” on page 159 for m ore in form ation .

Input Channels 17–20

In pu t ch an n els 17–20 are u sed for in tern al effect retu rn s from th e

EFF1 or EFF2 effects processor.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Input Channels

Insert Channels 1–4

You can use a Y-shaped insert cable to connect the VM200 to an

external effects processor. The signal ﬂows out of the VM200 Insert

connector, into and out of the effects processor, and back into the

VM200 via the insert cable.

Tip (Send)

from VM200 to Effects processor

Ring (Return)

from Effects processor to VM200

The Insert connectors allow you to insert a signal into the signal

chain after the PAD switches and TRIM knobs.

INPUT

OFF

+48V

to FX

INSERT

from FX

INSERT connectors 1-4

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pad Switches (Input channels 1–4)

Pad Sw itches (Input channels 1–4)

In pu t ch an n els 1 th rou gh 4 featu re 26 dB Pad switch es th at atten u -

ate th e in pu t sign al by 26 dB.

Th is allows th e in pu t pream p to work with h ot, h igh -level sign als,

su ch as th ose from a sn are dru m m icroph on e.

PAD

26dB

PAD

26dB

Not e: Pad switch settin gs are n ot stored in Scen e Mem ory.

TRIM Controls

You can adju st th e gain of th e in pu t ch an n el pream ps on in pu t ch an -

n els 1 th rou gh 4 by u sin g th e Trim con trols. You r goal is to optim ize

the in pu t sign al level to ach ieve the best signal-to-noise ratio.

Keep a close eye on th e level m eters wh ile adju stin g th e Trim con trols.

In gen eral, set th e levels as h igh as possible with ou t peakin g (actu ally,

it’s okay if th e level occa s iona lly peaks a little). If you set th e level too

h igh , th e sign al m ay distort an d or clip. If it’s set too low, th e ou tpu t

sign al m ay sou n d th in or n oisy.

INPUT 1

INPUT 2

INPUT 3

INPUT 4

INPUT 5

INPUT 6

INPUT 7

INPUT 8

PAD

26dB

PAD

26dB

PAD

26dB

TRIM

-60

-34

-16

-10

-50

-10

-50

-10

-50

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-10

-50

-16

-60

-34

+10

VM200 uses “boxed” values

when Pad switch is depressed.

Th e Trim con trols h ave an in pu t sen sitivity of –16 dB to –60 dB,

wh ich is appropriate for m an y m icroph on es. However, you can press

on e of th e Pad switch es for ch an n els 1–4 to redu ce th e in pu t sen sitiv-

ity for th at ch an n el to th e ran ge of +10 to –34 dB. Th is works well for

“h ot” m icroph on e sign als.

Th e Trim con trols on in pu t ch an n els 5–8 h ave a gain ran ge of –10 dB

to –50 dB. Th is works well with lin e-level sign als.

Not e: Trim con trol settin gs are n ot stored in Scen e Mem ory.

VM200 UserÕs Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Input Channels

Inverting the Input Phase

“Ph ase” con cern s th e tim in g of two differen t sign als. A pair of stereo

speakers can operate “in ph ase” or “ou t of ph ase.” If th e drivers in

th e left an d righ t speakers m ove in an d ou t at th e sam e tim e, in per -

fect con cert with on e an oth er, th e speakers are “in ph ase.” If th ey

are ou t of syn c, th ey are “ou t of ph ase.” Ou t-of-ph ase speakers ten d

to produ ce a weak stereo im age an d low bass ou tpu t.

Ph ase is often represen ted by th is sym bol: ∅.

On th e VM200, you can in vert th e ph ase for ch an n els 1–20. First you

access th e PHASE fu n ction page, th en press an [EQ EDIT] key to tu rn

ph ase in version on or off. A ligh t in dicator on th e display m ean s

ph ase is n orm al (off) for th at ch an n el; a dark (h igh ligh ted) in dicator

m ean s ph ase is in verted (on ).

You can u se th e ph ase in version software switch es to com pen sate for

balan ced cables or m icroph on es th at m ay h ave been wired in cor -

rectly, or at an y tim e you wish to in vert th e ph ase of a ch an n el to pre-

ven t sign al can cellation .

^1.Press t h e [ROUTING/ PHASE] k ey repeat edly t o display t h e

3:∅ PHASE fu n ct ion page.

Th e [ROUTING/ PHASE] key an d th e [EQ EDIT] keys for all selectable

ch an nels start to ﬂash (indicating their availability).

Th e 3:∅ PHASE fu n ction page in clu des a 1-by-20 m atrix th at in di-

cates wh eth er th e ph ase is n orm al or reversed for each ch an n el.

Indicates phase is normal.

Indicates Phase is reversed.

^2.Press a Page Select k ey t o select t h e t arget ch an n el layer,

t h en press t h e [EQ EDIT] k ey for an y ch an n el t o reverse it s

ph ase.

Th e [EQ EDIT] key ligh ts u p if you tu rn ph ase in version on .

Even wh en ch an n els are con ﬁgu red as stereo pairs, th eir ph ase

switch es can be set in depen den tly.

^3.Press t h e [EXIT] k ey or t h e [CHANNEL/ METER] k ey.

Th e VM200 displays th e CHANNEL EDIT fu n ction page.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Input Channel EQ

You can apply EQ to ch an n els 1—16 u sin g th e fou r -ban d param etric

equ alizer. For m ore in form ation on u sin g th e equ alizer, see “EQ” on

page 75.

Muting Channels

To m u te a ch an n el, u se th e Page Select keys to select th e desired

ch an n el layer, th en m ake su re th e ch an n el’s [ON] key is tu rn ed off.

If ch an n els are lin ked as a stereo pair (see “Pairin g Ch an n els” on

page 6 8) you can u se eith er ch an n el ’s [ON] key to tu rn th e pair off (or

on ).

You can also grou p in pu t ch an n els in to Mu te grou ps an d con trol th em

as on e, u sin g a sin gle [ON] key. (See “Grou pin g Mu te Ch an n els” on

page 68.)

Setting Channel Levels

You con trol in pu t ch an n el levels u sin g th e faders.

If it is n ot already selected, select th e desired ch an n el layer u sin g a

Page Select key, th en press th e ch an n el’s [ON] key.

Th e VM200 featu res seven Fader Modes. Th e faders con trol differen t

fu n ction s an d param eters depen din g on th e cu rren t Fader Mode.

You can select a Fader Mode by pressin g on e of th e keys in th e Fader

Mode section , su ch as [AUX1], [EFF2], [CHANNEL], etc. (See “Faders” on

page 32 for m ore in form ation abou t Fader Modes.)

If ch an n els are lin ked as a stereo pair or grou p, you can set th e ch an -

n el level for th e pair or grou p u sin g an y fader in th e pair or grou p. For

m ore in form a t i on , see “P airin g Ch an n els” on page 68.

Panning Input Channels

Use th e eigh t pan pot rotary con trols to pan th e sign al between th e

left an d righ t ch an n els of th e stereo ou tpu t.

1. Mak e su re t h at t h e [CHANNEL/ METER] k ey is lit . If n ot , press it

t o t u rn it on .

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Input Channels

Th e VM200 displays th e CHANNEL EDIT fu n ction page.

panpot icon

numeric pan value

hard left hard right

^2.Use t h e Page Select k eys t o select t h e t arget ch an n el layer.

^3.Use t h e pan pot rot ary con t rols t o m ak e t h e pan set t in gs.

Th e display sh ows a dial icon for each ch an n el th at visu ally in di-

cates th e pan position . Th e display also in clu des n u m erical val-

u es—su ch as L2.0 or R3.7—th at provide precise pan position

data.

If you pan h ard righ t or h ard left (th at is, fu lly righ t or left), th e

n u m erical valu e ch an ges to a left or righ t arrow to in dicate th at

th e m axim u m h as been reach ed.

Th e pan settin gs ran ge from L10.0 to R10.0 in in crem en ts of 0.5

(alth ou gh you ’ll n ever see R10.0 or L10.0 in dication s, becau se

th ese settin gs are th e m axim u m valu e an d are replaced by th e

arrow).

Routing Input Channels

You can con trol in pu t ch an n el rou tin g by u sin g th e on / off software

switch es on th e ROUTING fu n ction page.

Th e ROUTING fu n ction page in clu des switch es th at can rou te ch an n els

1–20 to th e Rec Bu ss an d Stereo Bu ss, an d ch an n els 1–8 to th e

ADAT Direct ou tpu ts. (You can n ot rou te ch an n els 9–20 to th e ADAT

Direct ou ts.)

^1.Press t h e [ROUTING/ PHASE] k ey t o display t h e 1:ROUTING fu n c-

t ion page.

Th e [EQ EDIT], [SOLO], an d [ON] keys start to ﬂash (in dicatin g

th eir availability). Th e [ROUTING/ PHASE] key also ﬂash es.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Monitoring and Soloing Input Channels

^2.Use t h e Page Select k eys t o select t h e t arget ch an n el layer.

3. Press t h e [EQ EDIT], [SOLO], or [ON] k ey t h at represen t s t h e

desired rou t in g for t h e t arget ch an n el.

See th e followin g table:

KEY

TARGET ROUTING

ADAT DIRECT OUT

REC BUS

EQ EDIT

SOLO

STEREO BUS

Wh en you press an [EQ EDIT], [SOLO], or [ON] key, th e key ligh ts u p

an d th e correspon din g in dicator on th e display tu rn s dark (h igh -

ligh ted). A ligh t em pty in dicator m ean s th e rou tin g is n ot selected

(off).

If ch an n els are con ﬁgu red as stereo pairs, th eir Rou tin g switch es

are also lin ked. (For m ore in form ation on pairin g ch an n els, see

“P airin g Ch an n els” on page 68.)

^4.Press t h e [EXIT] k ey or t h e [CHANNEL/ METER] k ey t o ret u rn t o

Ch an n el Edit m ode.

Monitoring and Soloing Input Channels

For in form ation on m on itorin g in pu t ch an n els, see “Mon itorin g Sig-

n als” on page 97

Feeding Outputs

REC Buss Out

You can rou te in pu t ch an n els 1–20 to th e Rec Bu ss ou ts. See “Usin g

th e REC BUSS OUT” on page 112 for m ore in form ation .

ST Buss Out

You can rou te in pu t ch an n els 1–20 to th e Stereo Bu ss ou ts. See

“Usin g th e ST BUSS OUT” on page 110 for m ore in form ation .

AUX Sends

You can rou te in pu t sign als to Au x 1, 2, 3, or 4 by pressin g th e [AUX1],

[AUX2], [AUX3], or [AUX4] key an d raisin g th e correspon din g fader. (You

can u se Au x 3 an d 4 wh en ADD. AUX m ode is tu rn ed on .) You can

also con ﬁgu re in pu t ch an n el sen ds as eith er pre-fader or post-fader.

See “Usin g th e AUX Sen ds” on page 115 for m ore in form ation .

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Input Channels

Digital Outs

You can select in pu t ch an n els 1–20 as sou rces for th e digital ou ts.

See “Digital Con n ection s” on page 159 for m ore in form ation .

Pairing Channels

You can create u p to ten pairs of ch an n els from in pu t ch an n els 1–20

to facilitate stereo sign al processin g.

You can pair on ly adjacen t odd/ even ch an n els, su ch as 1 an d 2, 5

an d 6, etc. (You can n ot pair n on -adjacen t ch an n els, su ch as 2 an d 7,

or even / odd pairs su ch as 4 an d 5.)

Th e followin g param eters are lin ked wh en in pu t ch an n els are paired:

EQ, [ON], [SOLO], an d [EQ EDIT] keys, faders, Au x sen ds, Effect sen ds,

Pre/ post settin gs, an d Rou tin g switch es.

^1.Press t h e [PAIR/ GROUP] k ey t o display t h e 1:CH PAIR fu n ct ion

page.

Th e [PAIR/ GROUP] key an d th e [EQ EDIT] keys start to ﬂash .

^2.If t h e appropriat e ch an n el layer is n ot yet select ed, press a

Page Select k ey t o select t h e desired ch an n el layer.

Th e selected Page Select key ligh ts u p.

^3.Press t h e [EQ EDIT] k ey for on e of t h e ch an n els you wish t o

pair.

Th e [EQ EDIT] keys for the chan nel pair light u p. The display high-

ligh ts th e in dicator for the chann el pair.

You can press a correspon ding [EQ EDIT] key to cancel any stereo

pair.

^4.Press t h e [EXIT] k ey or t h e [CHANNEL/ METER] k ey t o ret u rn t o

Ch an n el Edit m ode.

Grouping Mute Channels

You can grou p ch an n els 1-20 in to m u te grou ps. Th is en ables you to

m u te several ch an n els sim u ltan eou sly by pressin g a sin gle [ON] key.

For exam ple, you m ay wish to tu rn all th e ch an n els devoted to a ch o-

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Grouping Faders

ru s or dru m kit on an d off sim u ltan eou sly du rin g m ixdown . You can

grou p th ese ch an n els in to a m u te grou p.

Th ree grou ps are available: Mu te Grou ps A, B, an d C.

1. Press t h e [PAIR/ GROUP] k ey t wice t o display t h e 2:MUTE GROUP

fu n ct ion page.

THE [PAIR/ GROUP] key an d all [EQ EDIT], [SOLO], an d [ON] keys

ﬂash .

2. Press t h e [EQ EDIT] k eys for t h e ch an n els you wish t o add t o

Mu t e Grou p A.

The [EQ EDIT] keys ligh t u p and the corresponding indicators on the

display tu rn on (h ighligh t).

In th e exam ple above, chan nels 5, 6, 7, and 8 are assigned to Mu te

Grou p A. (No other channels are assigned to a Mu te grou p.)

3. Press t h e [SOLO] k eys for t h e ch an n els you wish t o add t o

Mu t e Grou p B.

The [SOLO] keys light u p and the corresponding in dicators on the

display tu rn on (h ighlight).

4. Press t h e [ON] k ey for t h e ch an n els you wish t o add t o Mu t e

Grou p C.

The [ON] keys light u p and the corresponding in dicators on the dis-

play tu rn on (h ighlight).

5. To rem ove a ch an n el from t h e m u t e grou p, press t h e corre-

spon din g [EQ EDIT], [SOLO], or [ON] k ey.

The key resu m es ﬂashing and the corresponding display indicator

tu rns off.

6. Press t h e [EXIT] k ey or t h e [CHANNEL/ METER] k ey t o ret u rn t o

Ch an n el Edit m ode.

Grouping Faders

You can grou p faders 1-8 in to Fader grou ps. Th is en ables you to con -

trol several faders sim u ltan eou sly u sin g on ly on e fader.

Three grou ps are available: Mu te Grou ps A, B, and C.

1. Press t h e [PAIR/ GROUP] k ey repeat edly t o display t h e 3:FADER

GROUP fu n ct ion page.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Input Channels

THE [PAIR/ GROUP] key an d all [EQ EDIT], [SOLO], an d [ON] keys

start to ﬂash .

In th e followin g exam ple, ch an n els 2, 6, an d 7 are assign ed to

Fader Grou p A. (No oth er ch an n els are assign ed to Fader

Grou ps.)

2. Press t h e [EQ EDIT] k eys for t h e faders you wish t o add t o

Fader Grou p A.

Th e [EQ EDIT] keys light u p an d the corresponding indicators on the

display tu rn on (highligh t).

3. Press t h e [SOLO] k eys for t h e faders you wish t o add t o Fader

Grou p B.

Th e [SOLO] keys ligh t u p and the corresponding in dicators on the

display tu rn on (highligh t).

4. Press t h e [ON] k eys for t h e faders you wish t o add t o Fader

Grou p C.

Th e [ON] keys ligh t u p and the corresponding indicators on the dis-

play tu rn on (highligh t).

5. To rem ove a fader from t h e fader grou p, press t h e correspon d-

in g [EQ EDIT], [SOLO], or [ON] k ey.

Th e key resu m es ﬂashing and the corresponding display indicator

tu rn s off.

6. Press t h e [EXIT] k ey or t h e [CHANNEL/ METER] k ey t o ret u rn t o

Ch an n el Edit m ode.

View ing Input Channel Settings

Th e CHANNEL VIEW fu n ction page en ables you to view th e settin gs for

an y in pu t ch an n el.

You can n ot adju st an y param eters on th e CHANNEL VIEW fu n ction page.

(If you try to adju st th e pan settin g, th e VM200 displays th e CHANNEL

EDIT fu n ction page.)

1. Press t h e [CH VIEW] k ey t o display t h e 1:CH VIEW fu n ct ion page.

Th e [CH VIEW] key an d the [EQ EDIT] keys for all viewable chann els

ﬂash . Th e selected Page Select key lights u p; u n selected Page Select

keys ﬂash .

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing Input Channel Settings

^2.Press t h e appropriat e Page Select k ey t o select t h e desired

ch an n el layer.

The selected Page Select key lights u p; u nselected Page Select keys

contin u e to ﬂash.

^3.Press t h e [EQ EDIT] k ey for t h e t arget ch an n el.

The selected [EQ EDIT] key lights u p. The nu m ber of the selected

chan nel appears in the u pper left portion of the CHANNEL VIEW fu n c-

tion page.

The followin g illu stration describes the com ponents of the CHANNEL

VIEW fu nction page.

channel pan setting

channel number

routing (Direct, Rec buss, St buss)

EQ curve graphic

sub-page title

EQ on/off

level meter

function page title

phase

aux send levels effect send levels

channel fader level

[ON] key status

EQ numeric settings

(gain, freq, Q)

fader group

mute group

^4.Press t h e [EXIT] k ey or t h e [CHANNEL/ METER] k ey t o ret u rn t o

Ch an n el Edit m ode.

VM200 UserÕs Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Input Channels

Copying Channel Settings

You can u se th e Ch an n el Copy fu n ction to copy in pu t ch an n el set-

tin gs from on e ch an n el to an oth er.

Th e CHANNEL COPY fu n ction page featu res a 1-by-20 m atrix th at

en ables you to select on e sou rce ch an n el, an d en able or disable th e

oth er ch an n els as copy destin ation s.

Th e selected sou rce ch an n el is m arked by an “S.” A h igh ligh ted in di-

cator m arks th e ch an n els targeted as copy destin ation s. A dark in di-

cator m ean s th e ch an n el is n ot selected (disabled) as a copy

destin ation .

1. Press t h e [CH VIEW] k ey t wice (from st art of cycle) t o display

t h e 2:CH COPY fu n ct ion page.

Th e [CH VIEW] key and th e [EQ EDIT] keys for all chan nels ﬂash . The

selected Page Select key lights u p; the u nselected Page Select keys

ﬂash .

2. Press t h e appropriat e Page Select k ey t o select t h e desired

ch an n el layer.

Th e selected Page Select key lights u p; u nselected Page Select keys

contin u e to ﬂash.

3. Press t h e [EQ EDIT] k ey for t h e copy sou rce ch an n el.

You can select only one sou rce channel to copy at a tim e.

Th e selected [EQ EDIT] key lights u p. The CHANNEL COPY fu nction page

m arks th e sou rce chann el with an “S” and prom pts you to select a

destination ch annel.

4. Press t h e appropriat e Page Select k ey t o specify t h e ch an n el

layer, t h en press t h e [EQ EDIT] k ey of t h e copy dest in at ion

ch an n el(s).

You can select m u ltiple channels as destinations.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Copying Channel Settings

The selected [EQ EDIT] key(s) light u p. The CHANNEL COPY fu nction

page highligh ts (enables) the selected destin ation channel(s) as fol-

lows.

5. Press t h e [ENTER] k ey t o execu t e t h e copy operat ion .

Th e CHANNEL COPY fu n ction page ﬂash es th e word “COMPLETE!” on

th e display for a few secon ds, an d th e VM200 displays th e ﬁrst CH

COPY fu n ction page.

6. Press t h e [EXIT] k ey or t h e [CHANNEL/ METER] k ey t o ret u rn t o

Ch an n el Edit m ode.

Not e: Even if ch an n els are paired, you can copy to an d from each

of th e paired ch an n els in depen den tly.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Input Channels

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAX

MIN

CHAPTER 5

EFF2

RECORDING MIXER

ORE

VM200

EFF EDIT

DIGIT

EFF1

EFF LIBRAR

RECALL

ORE

EQ ON

SELECTED EQ

EQ LIBRAR

-18

-24

REC BUSSSOLO

-36

-40

RECALL

ST BUSS/SOLO

About This Chapter

Th is ch apter explain s h ow to u se th e VM200 fou r -ban d param etric

SOLO

EXIT

EQ/HI

GAIN

equ alizer (EQ) an d h ow to edit, recall, an d store EQ settin gs.

EQ EDIT

17-20 EFF RTN

FREQ

SOLO

Chapter Contents

EQ EDIT

SOLO

GAIN

EQ/HI-MID

Equ alizers (EQ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

-10

Adju stin g th e EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

-20

EQ EDIT

ADA

AGE SELECT

-30

EQ En ablin g Ch an n els . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

9-16

-40

FREQ

SOLO

+10

-60

Bypassin g th e EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

-10

Resettin g th e EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

EQ EDIT

-20

EQ Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

SOLO

+10

-30

GAIN

EQ/LO-MID

-40

EQ Preset Library List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

-10

Recallin g EQ Program s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

EQ EDIT

-20

Storin g EQ Program s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

FREQ

SOLO

-30

-40

Ed i tin g EQ Program Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

-10

Copyin g EQ Settin gs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

EQ EDIT

EQ Preset L i b rary Param eters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

SOLO

“Mon itorin g” on page 100.

-40

-10

EQ EDIT

-20

SOLO

+10

-30

-40

-10

EQ EDIT

-20

SOLO

+10

-30

-40

-10

-20

+10

-30

-40

AIR/

-10

GROUP

-20

METER

+10

CHANNEL/

-30

-40

MMC SEND

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Equalizers (EQ)

Th e VM200 featu res a fou r -ban d param etric equ alizer for in pu t

ch an n els 1–16.

Th e fou r -ban d equ alizer su bdivides th e au dio spectru m in to LO,

LO-MID, HI-MID, an d HI frequ en cy ran ges. Each of th e fou r ban ds

in clu des rotary con trols for Gain , Frequ en cy, an d Q.

Th e LO-MID an d HI-MID ban ds u se param etric EQ. Th e LO ban d can

fu n ction as an HPF, sh elvin g, or param etric EQ; th e HI ban d can

fu n ction as an LPF, sh elvin g, or param etric EQ.

Th e Gain con trol adju sts th e am ou n t of in crease in a sign al, gen erally

m easu red in decibels (dB).

Th e Frequ en cy con trol speciﬁes th e n u m ber of cycles-per -secon d of

a waveform (in ou r case, sou n dwaves).

Th e Q con trol adju sts th e sh arpn ess of th e EQ peak respon se.

Th e LO ban d Q can fu n ction as a h igh -pass ﬁlter (HPF), an d HI ban d

Q can fu n ction as a low-pass ﬁlter (LPF).

A low-pass ﬁlter (LPF) rejects sign als above a certain cu t-off fre-

qu en cy wh ile passin g lower -frequ en cy sign als th rou gh .

A h igh -pass ﬁlter (HPF) rejects sign als below a certain cu t-off fre-

qu en cy wh ile passin g h igh er -frequ en cy sign als th rou gh .

In a sh elvin g-type (SHLV) EQ, th e boosted or cu t-off frequ en cies form

a sh elf-sh ape on a frequ en cy respon se cu rve. A h igh -frequ en cy sh elf

affects sign als at an d h igh er th an th e speciﬁed frequ en cy; a low fre-

qu en cy sh elf affects sign als at an d h igh er th an th e speciﬁed fre-

qu en cy.

Th e EQ EDIT fu n ction page displays a graph ic EQ respon se cu rve for

ch an n els 1 - 16. Th e EQ respon se cu rve provides visu al feedback to

h elp you sh ape th e EQ, wh ile th e n u m erical read-ou ts en su re

extrem ely accu rate settin gs th at you can store in th e EQ Library an d

later recall.

Th e EQ Library con sists of 50 Preset program s an d 50 User pro-

gram s. You can store EQ settin gs in to User program s, or in to Scen e

Mem ory alon g with all oth er m ix settin gs. You can also recall EQ set-

tin gs from th e Preset program s or User program s, or from Scen e

Mem ory alon g with all oth er m ix settin gs.

Th e Presets are a special collection of EQ settin gs th at can be u sefu l

in a variety of situ ation s. See “EQ Preset L i b rary L i s t” on page 83.

You can also u se th e Presets as tem plates th at you can cu stom ize to

create you r own EQ settin gs. You can n am e an d store u p to 50 of you r

favorite EQ settin gs as User program s.

If ch an n els are con ﬁgu red as a stereo pair, th eir EQs are lin ked.

Th e EQ param eters an d respon se cu rve for in pu t ch an n els 1 th rou gh

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjusting the EQ

16 appear on th e EQ EDIT fu n ction page, as sh own below:

EQ On

indicator

Adjusting the EQ

You can adju st th e EQ for each of th e fou r ban ds u sin g th ree rotary

con trols: Gain , Freq, an d Q. Th ese th ree EQ con trols form a trian gu -

lar sh ape on th e top pan el of th e VM200.

Th e LCD display also featu res fou r sets of th ree circu lar kn ob icon s.

Each set of th ree is arran ged in a trian gle th at correspon ds to th e

h ardware EQ rotary con trols. (Th at is, Gain is on top, Freq is on th e

lower -left, an d Q is on th e lower -righ t.)

Note th at in EQ Edit m ode, th e Pan rotary con trols adju st Freq an d Q.

EQ/LO

GAIN

EQ/LO-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI

GAIN

FREQ

PAN

FREQ

PAN

FREQ

PAN

FREQ

PAN

^1.Mak e su re t h at t h e [CHANNEL/ METER] k ey is lit . Ot h erwise,

press it t o t u rn it on .

^2.Press a Page Select k ey t o specify a ch an n el layer, su ch as [1 -8

ANALOG IN] k ey.

Th e selected Page Select key ligh ts u p red.

^3.Press t h e [EQ EDIT] k ey for t h e ch an n el wh ose EQ you wish t o

edit .

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Th e selected [EQ EDIT] key ligh ts u p an d th e VM200 displays th e

EQ EDIT fu n ction page.

^4.Press t h e [EQ ON] k ey in t h e Select ed EQ sect ion t o t u rn it on .

Th e [EQ ON] key ligh ts u p, an d th e VM200 tu rn s on th e EQ for th e

selected ch an n el.

Th e EQ On / Off in dicator in th e lower -righ t corn er of th e display

sh ows “On ” to in dicate th at th e EQ is tu rn ed on for th e speciﬁed

ch an n el.

Not e: Be aware th at th e EQ m ay n ot tu rn on for certain ch an n els

if th e EQ En able param eter settin g is in correct. Th e EQ En able

param eter appears on th e CURRENT SCENE STATUS fu n ction page. See

“E Q En ab l in g Ch a n n els” on page 80 f or m ore in fo r m at i on .

^5.Use t h e rot ary con t rols (Gain , Freq, an d Q) t o adju st t h e Fre-

qu en cy, Gain , an d Q param et ers.

Th e display sh ows a graph ic frequ en cy respon se cu rve.

You can watch a bell-sh aped cu rve swell as you in crease th e gain ,

or drop below th e m id-lin e wh en you redu ce th e gain .For exam -

ple, watch th e respon se cu rve swell as you raise th e EQ/ HI-MID

Gain , as illu strated in ﬁgu res A an d B below.

the response curve swells when Gain is raised

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjusting the EQ

If you lower th e Freq, th e soft bell-sh aped cu rve in Figu re B wou ld

m ove to th e left, as illu strated in Figu re C:

bell moves left

In Figu res D an d E below, n otice h ow th e frequ en cy ran ge is

redu ced an d th e respon se cu rve sh arpen s an d n arrows as th e

EQ/ HI-MID Q valu e is raised.

If you select HPF or LPF for LO ban d Q or HI ban d Q respectively,

th e Gain rotary con trol for LO EQ or HI EQ fu n ction s as th e

On / Off switch .

Th e followin g table sh ows th e VM200 EQ speciﬁcation s.

Lo-Mid

Hi-Mid

Gain (G)

–18.0 dB to +18.0 dB (0.5 dB steps)

20.3 Hz–4.00 kHz

(240 steps per 1/24 octave)

500Hz–20.3kHz

(240 steps per 1/24 octave)

Frequency (F)

HPF, 0.1–20

(45 steps),

Lo-shelf

LPF, 0.1–20

(45 steps),

Hi-shelf

0.1–20

(45 steps)

1. When the LO and HI EQ bands are conﬁgured as HPF and LPF, their gain controls

function as ﬁlter on and off switches.

VM200 UserÕs Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EQ Enabling Channels

You can en able th e EQ for th ree grou ps of ch an n els: 1–8, 9–16, or

1–16.

(Th e defau lt settin g en ables th e EQs for ch an n els 1–8.)

^1.Press t h e [CURRENT SCENE STATUS] k ey.

Th e CURRENT SCENE STATUS fu n ction page appears. Notice th e EQ

En able param eter in th e u pper -left corn er.

^2.Tu rn t h e ch an n el 1 / 2 Gain rot ary con t rol t o select 1 –8 , 9 –1 6 ,

or 1 –1 6 for t h e EQ En able param et er.

Th e selected valu e ﬂash es.

^3.Press t h e [ENTER] k ey t o con ﬁ rm you r select ion .

Th e VM200 displays th e selected valu e for th e EQ En able param -

eter.

^4.Press t h e [EXIT] k ey or t h e [CHANNEL/ METER] k ey t o ret u rn t o

Ch an n el Edit m ode.

Bypassing the EQ

You can tu rn a ch an n el’s EQ on or off (bypass) u sin g th e [EQ ON]

key.

Wh ile th e target ch an n el is selected (by pressin g a Page Select key

an d th e ch an n el’s [EQ EDIT] key), press th e [EQ ON] key to toggle

between EQ On an d Off.

Wh en th e EQ is on , a h igh ligh ted “ON” in dicator appears in th e

lower -righ t corn er of th e EQ EDIT fu n ction page. If th e EQ is bypassed,

“OFF” appears in th e sam e location .

^1.Press t h e [1 –8 ANALOG IN] or [9 –1 6 ADAT IN] Page Select k ey t o

select a ch an n el layer.

Th e selected Page Select key ligh ts u p.

^2.Press t h e [EQ EDIT] k ey for t h e ch an n el wh ose EQ you wish t o

t u rn on or off.

Th e selected [EQ EDIT] key ligh ts u p an d th e VM200 displays th e

EQ EDIT fu n ction page.

^3.Press t h e [EQ ON] k ey in t h e Select ed EQ sect ion .

Th e [EQ ON] key ligh ts u p, an d th e VM200 tu rn s on th e EQ for th e

selected ch an n el.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Resetting the EQ

Th e EQ On / Off in dicator in th e lower -righ t corn er of th e display

displays “On ” to in dicate th at th e EQ is tu rn ed on for th e speciﬁed

ch an n el.

^4.To t u rn t h e EQ off for t h e ch an n el, press t h e [EQ ON] k ey

again .

Th e [EQ ON] key tu rn s off (goes dark), an d th e VM200 tu rn s off th e

EQ for th e selected ch an n el.

Th e EQ On / Off in dicator in th e lower -righ t corn er of th e display

displays “Off” to in dicate th at th e EQ is tu rn ed off for th e speciﬁed

ch an n el.

EQ On/Off indicator. Here, EQ is bypassed.

Resetting the EQ

To reset all EQ param eters for th e selected ch an n el to th eir in itial val-

u es, follow th e steps below.

Th e followin g table sh ows in itial EQ valu es.

0 dB

Lo-Mid

0 dB

Hi-Mid

0 dB

Gain (G)

Frequency (F)

0 dB

125 Hz

500Hz

1.0

2.00 kHz

1.0

8.00 kHz

H-S(Hi-Shelf)

L-S(Lo-Shelf)

^1.Press t h e [EQ EDIT] k ey of t h e ch an n el wh ose EQ you wish t o

reset t o t h e in it ial valu e.

Th e [EQ EDIT] key ligh ts u p an d th e EQ EDIT fu n ction page appears.

^2.Wh ile pressin g an d h oldin g down t h e [ENTER] k ey, press t h e

[EQ EDIT] k ey.

Th e followin g con ﬁrm ation dialog appears on th e display.

^3.Press t h e [ENTER] k ey t o proceed, or press t h e [EXIT] k ey t o

can cel t h e reset operat ion .

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If you h ave pressed th e [ENTER] key, all EQ param eters for th e

ch an n el will be reset to th e in itial valu es.

^4.Press t h e [EXIT] k ey or t h e [CHANNEL/ METER] k ey t o ret u rn t o

Ch an n el Edit m ode.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EQ Library

You can store EQ settin gs as program s in th e EQ Library.

Th e EQ Library con tain s 50 preset program s (Preset Library: 0–49)

an d 50 u ser program s (User Library: 50–99).

For in form ation on recallin g EQ program s, see “Recallin g EQ Pro-

gram s” on page 84.

For in form ation on storin g a n ew or m odiﬁed EQ program , see “Stor -

in g EQ Program s” on page 86.

EQ Preset Library List

Name

Flat_EQ

Real_Pf

LightKick

TightKick

Loud_Kick

Ana.Kick

Snappy_SD

Power_SD

Deep_SD

Talk_Tom

Melo.Tom

W.GongTom

Brill.Cym

Lo-Fi_Cym

Vivid_HH

Sharp_HH

Lo-Fi_HH

Perc.

E.Pf

Clean_EG

Crunch_EG

OverDrvEG

Dist.EG

Metal_EG

Stroke_AG

StrokeEAG

Arpeg.GG

Arpeg.EAG

Arpeg.AG

Brass_Sec

W.WingSec

Male_Vo1

Male_Vo2

FemaleVo1

FemaleVo2

Chorus

Tamb.

Fat_Bass

Norm.Bass

Loud_Bass

PowerBass

Bright_Pf

Loud_Pf

Speech_1

Speech_2

Digi.Mix

AnalogMix

Telephone

Husky

Power_Pf

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Recalling EQ Program s

You can recall EQ program s from th e EQ Library, wh ich in clu des 50

Preset program s an d 50 User program s.

^1.Press t h e [1 –8 ANALOG IN] or [9 –1 6 ADAT IN] Page Select k ey t o

select t h e desired ch an n el layer.

Th e selected Page Select key ligh ts u p.

Not e: Make su re you select th e “EQ En abled” ch an n el layer.

For m ore in form ation , see “EQ En ablin g Ch an n els” on

page 75.

^2.Press t h e [EQ EDIT] k ey for t h e ch an n el t o wh ich you wan t t o

recall an EQ set t in g.

Th e selected [EQ EDIT] key ligh ts u p.

Th e VM200 displays th e EQ EDIT fu n ction page, wh ich sh ows th e

param eter settin gs for th e selected ch an n el.

indicates EQ parameter settings for Channel 3

^3.Press t h e Select ed EQ [EQ ON] k ey t o t u rn it on .

^4.Press t h e EQ Library [RECALL] k ey.

Th e VM200 displays th e EQ LIBRARY RECALL fu n ction page. Th e [EQ

EDIT] key for th e selected ch an n el ﬂash es.

scrollable list of EQ programs

^5.Rot at e t h e Dat a Wh eel or u se t h e [</ -1 ] an d [+1 / >] k eys t o

select an EQ program .

EQ Program n am es an d n u m bers (00 to 99) scroll in th e

u pper -righ t of th e display.

^6.Press t h e [ENTER] k ey t o recall t h e desired EQ Program .

Th e VM200 displays th e EQ EDIT fu n ction page, wh ich sh ows th e

n ew EQ param eter valu es applied to th e cu rren t ch an n el.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Recalling EQ Programs

^7.To recall an EQ program for an ot h er ch an n el, press t h e [EQ

EDIT] k ey of t h e dest in at ion ch an n el, t h en repeat St eps 2

t h rou gh 5 .

^8.Press t h e [EXIT] k ey at an y t im e t o exit t h e EQ Library Recall

page an d ret u rn t o t h e CHANNEL EDIT fu n ct ion page.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Storing EQ Program s

You can store n ew EQ settin gs as EQ program s in th e EQ Library.

You can store EQ settin gs as User program s 50 th rou gh 99. (Pro-

gram s 0 th rou gh 49 are read-on ly Presets.)

^1.Press t h e EQ Library [STORE] k ey t o display t h e EQ LIBRARY

STORE fu n ct ion page.

Th e [EQ EDIT] key of th e selected ch an n el ﬂash es.

^2.Rot at e t h e Dat a Wh eel or u se t h e [</ -1 ] an d [+1 / >] k eys t o

select an EQ program locat ion (from 5 0 t o 9 9 , in clu sive).

EQ Program n am es an d n u m bers (50 to 99) scroll in th e

u pper -righ t of th e display.

Not e: EQ program location s th at con tain n o data are labeled

“(No Data)”.

^3.Press t h e [ENTER] k ey.

Th e VM200 displays th e EQ LIBRARY NAME EDIT fu n ction page.

character-selector

cursor

character selector box

title box

Th e EQ LIBRARY NAME EDIT fu n ction page in clu des a ch aracter selec-

tor box th at displays all th e letters of th e alph abet, as well as

n u m erals an d pu n ctu ation sym bols. You can u se th ese ch arac-

ters to n am e or title you r EQ program .

You can u se an y trio of Gain , Freq, an d Q rotary con trols to select

th e ch aracters for th e title.

Th e Gain con trol m oves th e cu rsor left an d righ t in th e title box.

Th e Freq con trol m oves th e ch aracter -selector u p an d down th e

m atrix; th e Q con trol m oves th e ch aracter -selector left an d righ t.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Storing EQ Programs

^4.Use t h e Freq an d Q con t rols t o select a ch aract er, t h en t u rn

t h e Gain con t rol on e n ot ch t o t h e righ t t o m ove t h e cu rsor t o

t h e n ext space in t h e n am e, an d repeat t h e process.

Th e very u sefu l “Space to En d” option in th e ch aracter selector box

will ﬁll-in th e rem ain der of you r title with blan k spaces.

^5.Wh en you ’ve ﬁ n ish ed n am in g t h e program , press t h e [ENTER]

k ey t o st ore t h e EQ program .

Th e followin g warn in g dialog appears for a brief m om en t, followed

by th e EQ EDIT fu n ction page.

Warn in g: Do n ot power off th e VM200 wh ile it is writin g to m em ory

or you m ay dam age th e system .

^6.Press t h e [EXIT] k ey an y t im e t o exit t h e EQ LIBRARY STORE or EQ

LIBRARY NAME EDIT fu n ct ion pages.

Th e VM200 displays th e CHANNEL EDIT fu n ction page.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Editing EQ Program Titles

You can edit EQ program titles, ju st in case you wan t to ch an ge its

n am e for som e reason . To do so, you recall th e target EQ program to

a ch an n el, th en store it again with a differen t title.

^1.Select a ch an n el t o wh ich you wish t o recall t h e EQ program

you are goin g t o ren am e by pressin g t h e ch an n el [EQ EDIT]

k ey.

Th e VM200 displays th e EQ EDIT fu n ction page.

^2.Press t h e EQ Library [RECALL] k ey t o display t h e EQ LIBRARY

RECALL fu n ct ion page.

Th e [EQ EDIT] key of th e selected ch an n el ﬂash es.

^3.Rot at e t h e Dat a Wh eel or u se t h e [</ -1 ] an d [+1 / >] k eys t o

select an EQ program you wish t o ren am e.

You can n ot ch an ge th e n am es of Preset program s 00–49.

^4.Press t h e [ENTER] k ey t o recall t h e desired EQ Program .

Th e VM200 displays th e EQ EDIT fu n ction page, wh ich sh ows th e

recalled EQ param eter valu es applied to th e cu rren t ch an n el.

^5.Press t h e EQ Library [STORE] k ey t o display t h e EQ LIBRARY

STORE fu n ct ion page.

Th e VM200 h igh ligh ts th e selected EQ program n am e an d n u m -

ber.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Editing EQ Program Titles

^6.Press t h e [ENTER] k ey.

Th e VM200 displays th e EQ LIBRARY NAME EDIT fu n ction page. Th e

title box sh ows th e program n u m ber, bu t th e n am e is n ow blan k.

character-selector

cursor

character selector box

title box

Use an y Gain , Freq, an d Q rotary con trols to re-assign a n am e to

th e EQ program . Refer to “Storin g EQ Program s” on page 86 f or

m ore in form ation on con trollin g th e cu rsor an d ch aracter selector.

^7.Wh en you ’ve ﬁ n ish ed re-n am in g t h e program , press t h e

[ENTER] k ey t o st ore t h e n ew EQ program t it le.

Th e VM200 displays th e EQ EDIT fu n ction page.

WARNING: Do n ot power off th e VM200 wh ile it is writin g to

m em ory or you m ay dam age th e system .

8. Press t h e [EXIT] k ey at an y t im e t o exit t h e EQ LIBRARY STORE or

EQ LIBRARY NAME EDIT fu n ct ion pages.

Th e VM200 displays th e CHANNEL EDIT fu n ction page.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Copying EQ Settings

You can u se th e EQ Copy fu n ction to copy EQ settin gs from on e

ch an n el to an oth er.

Th e EQ COPY fu n ction page featu res a 1-by-20 m atrix th at en ables you

to select on e sou rce ch an n el EQ, an d en able or disable th e oth er

ch an n els as copy destin ation s.

Th e selected sou rce ch an n el EQ is m arked by an “S.” A h igh ligh ted

in dicator m arks th e ch an n els targeted as copy destin ation s. A dark

in dicator m ean s th e ch an n el is n ot selected (disabled) as a copy des-

tin ation .

^1.Press t h e [CH VIEW] k ey t wice (from st art of cycle).

Th e VM200 displays th e 3:EQ COPY fu n ction page.

Th e [CH VIEW] key and th e [EQ EDIT] keys for all chann els ﬂash. The

selected Page Select key lights u p; u nselected Page Select keys ﬂash.

^2.Press t h e appropriat e Page Select k ey t o select t h e desired

ch an n el layer.

Th e selected Page Select key ligh ts u p; u n selected Page Select keys

continu e to ﬂash.

^3.Press t h e [EQ EDIT] k ey for t h e EQ copy sou rce ch an n el.

You can select only one sou rce channel EQ to copy at a tim e.

Th e selected [EQ EDIT] key lights u p. The EQ COPY fu nction page

m arks th e sou rce chann el with an “S” and prom pts you to select a

destination ch annel.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Copying EQ Settings

^4.Press t h e appropriat e Page Select k ey t o specify t h e ch an n el

layer, t h en press t h e [EQ EDIT] k ey of t h e copy dest in at ion

ch an n el(s).

You can select m u ltiple ch annels as EQ copy destinations.

The selected [EQ EDIT] key(s) light u p. The EQ COPY fu nction page

high lights (enables) the selected destination channel(s) as follows.

source channel

oneof four destination channels

5. Press t h e [ENTER] k ey t o execu t e t h e copy operat ion .

Th e EQ COPY fu n ction page ﬂash es th e word “COMPLETE!” on th e

display for a few secon ds, an d th e VM200 displays th e ﬁrst CH COPY

fu n ction page.

6. Press t h e [EXIT] k ey or t h e [CHANNEL/ METER] k ey t o ret u rn t o

Ch an n el Edit m ode.

Not e: Even if ch an n els are paired, you can copy to an d from each

of th e paired ch an n els in depen den tly.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EQ Preset Library Param eters

Parameter

Name

Description

0.0dB

.125

L-S

Lo-Mid Hi-Mid

0.0dB

8.00K

H-S

Gain

Freq.

0.0dB

500

1.0

0.0dB

2.00K

1.0

A ﬂat equalizing pattern

used for initialized EQ.

00 Flat_EQ

Gain

Freq.

+4.0

105

1.6

-12.0

324

+4.0

4.12K

0.40

+6.5

2.83K

2.8

0.0

Relatively light and nim-

ble kick sound.

01 LightKick

02 TightKick

03 Loud_Kick

04 Ana.Kick

05 Snappy_SD

06 Power_SD

07 Deep_SD

08 Talk_Tom

09 Melo.Tom

10 W.GongTom

11 Brill.Cym

12 Lo-Fi_Cym

8.00K

Gain

Freq.

+8.0

70.2

1.1

-7.5

364

5.0

Creates a peak around

13.5K 70Hz, producing a tight,

stiff sound.

LPF

Gain

Freq.

Emphasizes the attack

of the beat, increasing

the mass of the entire

kick.

+4.5

102

1.0

-6.5

306

3.2

+5.0

1.46K

4.5

+4.0

6.35K

H-S

Gain

Freq.

+5.5

102

L-S

+1.0

91.0

5.0

-6.0

-1.5

Makes an analog kick

sound more boomy.

2.12K

7.9

12.7K

H-S

Gain

Freq.

-4.5

111

L-S

0.0

_3.5

3.89K

0.16

+3.5

2.45K

0.45

+4.0

4.24K

2.2

+4.0

8.23K

H-S

Emphasizes snare

sounds.

841

3.5

Gain

Freq.

+2.0

149

L-S

-9.5

281

+4.5

Adds powerful thrust

5.04K and clariﬁes snare

sound.

0.13

Gain

Freq.

0.0

+3.0

545

4.5

0.0

Creates a heavy-weight

125

L-S

8.00K snare sound with great

depth.

H-S

Gain

Freq.

+9.5

102

2.0

-10.0

687

6.3

+9.0

4.36K

1.4

+2.0

Creates the “leathery”

decay of a tom.

10.7K

H-S

Gain

Freq.

Creates a melodious

atmosphere by limiting

the body resonance of a

tom.

-10.0

83.4

L-S

+2.0

216

4.5

+2.5

5.50K

1.1

0.0

8.00K

H-S

Gain

Freq.

-12.00 +10.00

-8.0

-12.0

8.00K

H-S

Creates a wooden tom

sound.

.125

L-S

-6.0

55.7

L-S

0.0

500

5.0

3.78K

Gain

Freq.

-1.0

397

8.9

0.0

+7.0

Creates a “sparkling”

1.94K

1.0

5.66K and brilliant cymbal

sound.

H-S

Gain

Freq.

Emphasizes the mid to

low range to mufﬂe

“sparkling” part of cym-

bals.

+2.5

172

3.2

-4.0

-&.0

4.00K

H-S

40.5

L-S

3.27K

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EQ Preset Library Parameters

Parameter

Name

Description

-7.5

93.6

L-S

Lo-Mid Hi-Mid

+4.0

Gain

Freq.

-2.5

472

0.79

-6.5

771

5.6

+4.0

2.31K

1.0

Emphasizes the pres-

8.00K ence of a high-hat in the

13 Vivid_HH

14 Sharp_HH

15 Lo-Fi_HH

16 Perc.

ensemble.

H-S

Gain

Freq.

-9.0

68.2

L-S

+4.5

7.13K

+3.5

Creates a tight high-hat

16.0K with stiff and powerful

characteristics.

0.10

Gain

Freq.

-2.5

93.6

L-S

0.0

+4.5

2.31K

0.71

+1.0

1.94K

0.35

+1.0

3.17K

-18.0

Eliminates metallic ele-

8.00K ments and emphasizes

472

0.79

0.0

lo-ﬁ high-hat sound.

H-S

Gain

Freq.

Emphasizes the attack and

clariﬁes the high-range of

instruments, such as con-

gas, and bongos.

-4.0

102

L-S

+7.0

5.82K

H-S

397

4.5

Gain

Freq.

Creates a subtle

essence by emphasiz-

ing the presence of a

tambourine.

-5.0

125

L-S

-0.5

375

2.5

+2.5

8.00K

H-S

17 Tamb.

Gain

Freq.

0.0

+4.5

105

0.10

+4.5

105

5.0

+2.5

2.38K

6.3

+0.5

Makes an electric bass

18 Fat_Bass

19 Norm.Bass

20 Loud_Bass

21 PowerBass

22 Bright_Pf

23 Loud_Pf

24 Power_Pf

25 Real_Pf

99.2

L-S

4.24K sound fatter by empha-

sizing the low range.

H-S

Gain

Freq.

Makes an all-round elec-

tric bass sound by cut-

ting very low

-9.0

31.3

L-S

+3.5

2.12K

0.40

+2.5

1.26K

2.2

0.0

4.24K

H-S

frequencies.

Gain

Freq.

+3.5

121

2.0

0.0

Use for analog bass with

182

7.9

12.0K boosted low limit and

attack ranges.

H-S

Gain

Freq.

+6.0

83.4

L-S

+3.0

917

7.9

0.0

Use on a PCM bass with

boosted low range.

4.00K

3.2

8.00K

H-S

Gain

Freq.

-4.0

81.8

L-S

0.0

+2.5

2.45K

1.6

+5.0

Use to make a piano

sound brighter.

375

3.2

8.98K

H-S

Gain

Freq.

+5.5

187

3.5

-9.0

578

+2.5

3.27K

3.2

+4.5

Adds “weight” to the low

5.34K range of a piano sound

with lots of harmonics.

H-S

Gain

Freq.

-8.5

28.7

L-S

-5.5

273

1.0

+4.5

3.17K

6.3

+9.0

Use on a piano solo to

8.23K add tightness and

spread.

3.5

Gain

Freq.

Simulates a real

-4.5

51.1

L-S

+8.0

397

4.5

+1.0

1.54K

5.6

-10.0

8.00K

H-S

mid-range piano sound,

including the hammer

action during key strokes.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Parameter

Name

Description

Lo-Mid Hi-Mid

Gain

Freq.

Emphasizes the attack

and distortion of popular

electric piano’s key

strokes.

-6.5

22.1

L-S

+5.5

243

5.0

+3.5

3.56K

+10.5

20.2K

H-S

26 E.Pf

Gain

Freq.

+3.0

216

0.22

+3.0

140

7.9

-6.5

386

+1.0

1.46K

6.3

+3.5

Use for a clean electric

27 Clean_EG

28 Crunch_EG

5.34K guitar to get a brighter

sound.

H-S

Gain

Freq.

Emphasizes the pres-

ence and adjusts the

tonal quality of a slightly

distorted guitar sound.

0.0

+3.5

2.00K

0.89

+3.0

2.59K

+3.0

5.19K

7.1

500

1.0

Gain

Freq.

Emphasizes the mid

range of mellow over-

drive electric guitar to

add fatness and rich-

ness.

+3.5

108

+2.0

375

0.0

8.00K

29 OverDrvEG

7.9

0.50

0.20

H-S

0.0

Gain

Freq.

+5.5

364

L-S

+6.5

250

L-S

-3.0

125

1.0

0.0

917

7.9

+4.0

3.56K

Makes a heavily dis-

30 Dist.EG

8.00K torted guitar sound

clearer.

H-S

Gain

Freq.

-9.5

1.12K

+5.0

4.49K

4.0

+4.0

Emphasizes the edge of

high-gain metal sound.

31 Metal_EG

32 Stroke_AG

33 StrokeEAG

34 Arpeg.GG

35 Arpeg.EAG

36 Arpeg.AG

37 Brass_Sec

38 W.WingSec

12.0K

H-S

Gain

Freq.

Emphasizes the bright

chordal strokes of an

acoustic guitar, reduc-

ing the body resonance.

0.0

+1.5

1.94K

2.8

+5.5

7.13K

H-S

794

3.2

Gain

Freq.

-4.0

250

L-S

-3.0

149

L-S

-1.5

210

L-S

0.0

-3.0

687

8.9

0.0

+2.5

Use on a tight elec-

2.00K

1.0

4.49K tric-acoustic guitar in a

band context.

H-S

Gain

Freq.

-3.0

223

4.0

+4.0

3.08K

5.6

+2.5

Corrects and clariﬁes

8.00K the arpeggio technique

of a gutsy guitar sound.

H-S

Gain

Freq.

Adjusts the balance of

chords & arpeggios of

an electric acoustic gui-

tar sound.

0.0

+3.0

9.42K

0.10

+5.0

4.24K

H-S

1.00K

4.0

3.78K

4.0

Gain

Freq.

Cuts the body resonance

of an acoustic guitar

sound and clariﬁes an

arpeggio guitar sound.

-6.5

530

7.1

0.0

149

L-S

-2.5

96.4

2.5

2.52K

4.5

Gain

Freq.

Adjusts the balance of

brass section sound

(such as trumpets and

trombones).

0.0

+2.0

2.52K

0.79

0.0

+4.0

5.66K

5.0

917

1.6

Gain

Freq.

Emphasizes the rich

mid-range of wind

instruments, such as

clarinets and oboes.

+3.0

125

L-S

+4.0

257

2.2

0.0

3.38K

2.5

8.00K

H-S

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EQ Preset Library Parameters

Parameter

Name

Description

-1.0

157

L-S

Lo-Mid Hi-Mid

+3.0

Gain

Freq.

0.0

1.00K

4.5

+2.0

2.00K

0.56

-2.0

Adds changes to

6.17K expression male of tenor

39 Male_Vo1

40 Male_Vo2

41 FemaleVo1

42 FemaleVo2

43 Chorus

vocals.

H-S

Gain

Freq.

Adds changes to

expression of bass and

baritone male vocal

sound

+2.5

140

L-S

-4.0

243

7.9

+4.5

6.73K

H-S

2.59

3.2

Gain

Freq.

-2.0

121

L-S

+1.5

408

0.45

+2.0

324

0.20

-0.5

817

2.2

+2.0

2.59K

0.63

+2.5

2.06K

0.22

+1.0

2.12K

0.71

+1.5

2.59K

0.71

+3.5

2.67K

1.0

+3.0

Adds changes to

8.72K expression of soprano

female vocal sound.

H-S

Gain

Freq.

-7.0

118

L-S

+3.5

Adds changes to

6.73K expression of alto

female vocal sound.

H-S

Gain

Freq.

-3.0

99.2

3.2

+3.5

Adds changes to

5.34K expression of the entire

high-tone chorus part.

7.9

Gain

Freq.

-4.5

99.2

4.5

-1.5

687

7.1

0.0

Use to record clear male

narration.

44 Speech_1

45 Speech_2

46 Digi.Mix

8.00K

H-S

Gain

Freq.

-5.0

55.7

L-S

-2.0

229

3.5

0.0

Use to record clear

8.00K

female narration.

H-S

Gain

Freq.

Use to record from classic

analog 6mm or cassette

tape to make the sound

clearer, like digital audio.

+6.0

51.1

L-S

0.0

+6.0

12.0K

H-S

420

1.0

4.00K

1.0

Gain

Freq.

-7.0

57.3

3.5

-7.0

Cuts the high range to

47 AnalogMix

48 Telephone

49 Husky

33.1

HPF

6.54K

1.4

10.7K obtain the reverse

effects of program 45.

LPF

Gain

Freq.

0.0

+12.0

1.00K

5.0

Emphasizes only the

420

HPF

500

1.0

2.52K mid range to simulate a

telephone sound.

LPF

Gain

Freq.

-5.5

172

1.0

+2.0

4.62K

0.32

+8.0

Emphasizes only the

102

HPF

8.00K high range to creates a

husky voice.

H-S

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CHAPTER 6

Monitoring Signals

RECORDING MIXER

VM200

DIGIT

EXIT

-12

-18

-24

-36

-40

S/S

AboutThis Chapter

This chapter explains how to monitor signals on the VM200, includ-

ing selecting a monitor output, soloing, using the two-track input,

as well as viewing meters and send levels.

-40

-30

17-20

Chapter Contents

I-M

-10

Monitoring and Soloing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

-20

MON SEL Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

-30

9-16

-40

+10

SOLO MODE Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

-60

Two Track Input (2TRK IN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

-10

Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

-M

-20

-40

/LO

+10

-30

Soloing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

+10

-40

Metering Signal Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

-10

Viewing Input/Output Level Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

-20

+10

LED Display Meter (L/R or ST BUSS/SOLO). . . . . .

-3

. . . 106

-4

Viewing Individual Channel, Aux Send, and Effect Send Meters106

-10

-20

+10

-30

-40

-10

-20

-30

-40

-30

-20

-10

-20

+10

-30

-4

-10

-20

+10

-30

EFF2

-40

AUX4

AUX2

-10

CHANNEL

ADD.AUX

-20

+10

-30

-40

EFF1

AUX3

AUX1

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Monitoring Signals

Monitoring and Soloing

Th e ﬂexible m on itorin g an d soloin g capabilities of th e VM200 en able

you to u se th e m ixer in a wide ran ge of application s.

Th e m on itorin g fu n ction s en able you to listen to in pu t ch an n el sig-

n als or bu ss sign als th rou gh con n ected m on itor speakers or h ead-

ph on es.

Th e soloin g fu n ction en ables you to select th e ch an n els you wan t to

h ear wh ile exclu din g all oth er ch an n els. Th is lets you focu s you r

atten tion on certain tracks in th e m ix.

For exam ple, say you wan t to listen closely to th e way th e rh yth m sec-

tion is workin g in a m ix. Th e solo fu n ction lets you “solo” th e ch an -

n els th at carry th e bass an d dru m s, wh ile exclu din g th e ch an n els

dedicated to th e oth er in stru m en ts.

You specify th e ch an n els you wan t to h ear by pressin g th e corre-

spon din g ch an n el [SOLO] keys on th e top pan el.

Th e Setu p:System 1:CLOCK/ MON fu n ction page featu res two param eters

th at con trol th e m on itorin g an d soloin g fu n ction s of th e VM200: th e

MON SEL (m on itor select) an d SOLO MODE param eters.

You can display th e 1:CLOCK/ MON fu n ction page by pressin g th e [SYS-

TEM] key.

MON SEL parameter

SOLO MODE parameter

MON SEL Param eter

Th e Mon Sel (Mon itor Select) param eter en ables you to select th e

sou rce for th e MONITOR OUT an d PHONES jack.

(However, if a ch an n el is “soloed,” it will override th e selection of th e

Mon Sel param eter.)

You can select on e of th e followin g sou rces: ST-B (stereo bu ss),

REC-B (record bu ss), AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, AUX4, EFF1, EFF2,

AUX1&2, or AUX3&4. For m ore in form ation on th ese option s, see

SOLO MODE Param eter

Th e Solo Mode param eter en ables you to con ﬁgu re th e solo fu n ction

of th e VM200.

You can solo in pu t ch an n els 1 th rou gh 20 an d th e bu ss ou ts by

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Monitor Outs and Phones

pressin g th e [SOLO] key for th e desired ch an n el.

Two Solo m odes are available: PFL (Pre-Fader Listen ) an d M–SOLO

(Mix Solo).

See “S oloin g” on page 101 for m ore in form ation .

Monitor Outs and Phones

You can ou tpu t Mon itor an d Solo sign als via th e MONITOR OUT an d

PHONES jacks.

Make su re th e 2TRK IN switch is n ot pressed in for m on itorin g (u n less

you wan t to con ﬁden ce m on itor), or you will n ot h ear a sign al. (See

2TRK IN, below, for m ore in form ation .)

You can con n ect a m on itor system (am pliﬁer an d speakers) to th e

MONITOR OUT ph on o jacks on th e rear pan el. You can u se th e Mon -

itor Gain con trol, located at th e top righ t of th e con trol su rface, to

adju st th e level of th e m on itor ou t sign al.

You can con n ect a pair of stereo h eadph on es to th e PHONES stereo

(TRS) ph on e jack. Th e PHONES sign al is th e sam e as th e MONITOR

OUT sign al. You can adju st th e level of th e ph on es sign al u sin g th e

Ph on es Gain con trol.

MONITOR

PHONES

2TRK IN

GAIN

MIN

MAX

MIN

MAX

PHONES Gain

(top panel}

MONITOR Gain

Two Track Input (2TRK IN)

If you press th e 2TRK IN switch on th e top pan el, you can m on itor

sign als th at are con n ected to th e 2TRK IN jacks on th e rear pan el.

Th e sign al is sen t to th e MONITOR OUT an d PHONES jacks.

You can con n ect th e stereo ou tpu ts of a m aster recorder, for exam -

ple, to th e 2TRK IN jacks for con ﬁden ce m on itorin g or m aster play-

back.

Th e 2TRK IN accepts ph on o jacks with a –10 dBV n om in al in pu t level.

MONITOR

PHONES

2TRK IN

GAIN

2TRK IN switch

MIN

MAX

MIN

MAX

2TRK IN jacks (rear panel)

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Monitoring Signals

Monitoring

You can m on itor th e followin g sou rces: Stereo Bu ss, Rec Bu ss,

Au x1, Au x2, Au x3, Au x4, Eff1, Eff2, Au x 1&2, or Au x 3&4. (AUX 3

an d 4 are available on ly wh en th e ADD. AUX param eter is tu rn ed

on . For m ore in form ation , see page 115.)

You can select a m on itor sou rce u sin g th e m on itor select (Mon Sel)

param eter on th e ﬁrst SYSTEM fu n ction page. Follow th ese steps:

1. Mak e su re a m on it orin g syst em (am p an d speak ers) is con -

n ect ed t o t h e MONITOR OUT jack s, or t h at st ereo h eadph on es

are con n ect ed t o t h e PHONES jack . Also, m ak e su re t h e 2 TRK

IN swit ch is n ot pressed in .

2. Set t h e Mon it or Gain con t rol t o abou t h alfway.

(For h eadph on es, set th e Ph on es Gain con trol to abou t h alfway.)

3. Press t h e Set u p [SYSTEM] k ey.

Th e VM200 displays th e 1:CLOCK/ MON fu n ction page.

4. Rot at e t h e ch an n el 3 / 4 (EQ/ LO-MID) Gain rot ary con t rol t o

select t h e desired sou rce for t h e Mon Sel param et er.

EQ/LO

GAIN

EQ/LO-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI

GAIN

FREQ

PAN

FREQ

PAN

FREQ

PAN

FREQ

PAN

MONITOR SELECT (MON. SEL.) PARAMETER OPTIONS

ST-B

Stereo Buss (default setting)

Record Buss

REC-B

AUX1

AUX2

AUX3

AUX4

EFF1

Auxiliary 1

Auxiliary 2

Auxiliary 3

Auxiliary 4

Effect processor EFF1

Effect processor EFF2

Auxiliary 1 and Auxiliary 2 mixed

Auxiliary 3 and Auxiliary 4 mixed

EFF2

AUX1&2

AUX3&4

5. Press t h e [CHANNEL/ METER] or [EXIT] k ey.

Th e VM200 exits Setu p m ode an d displays th e CHANNEL EDIT fu n c-

tion page.

100

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Soloing

A Solo fu n ction is available for in pu t ch an n els 1 th rou gh 20 th at

en ables you to m on itor speciﬁc ch an n els.

Two solo m odes are available: PFL an d M-Solo.

PFL is an abbreviation for Pre-Fader Listen , in wh ich you can m on itor

a sign al th at appears before it is adju sted by th e fader.

M-Solo m ean s “m ix solo,” wh ich en ables you to m om en tarily m on itor

th e stereo bu ss sign al (i.e., th e m ix).

You can select a solo m ode by u sin g th e Solo Mode param eter on th e

ﬁrst SETUP:SYSTEM fu n ction page.

You can also con trol h ow [SOLO] keys are tu rn ed on an d off.

To u se th e Solo fu n ction , follow th e steps below:

1. Mak e su re a m on it orin g syst em (am p an d speak ers) is con -

n ect ed t o t h e MONITOR OUT jack s, or t h at st ereo h eadph on es

are con n ect ed t o t h e PHONES jack . Also, m ak e su re t h e 2 TRK

IN swit ch is n ot pressed in .

2. Set t h e Mon it or Gain con t rol t o abou t h alfway.

(If you are u sin g h eadph on es, set th e Ph on es Gain con trol to

abou t h alfway.)

3. Press t h e Set u p [SYSTEM] k ey.

Th e VM200 displays th e 1:CLOCK/ MON fu n ction page.

4. Rot at e t h e ch an n el 5 / 6 (EQ/ HI-MID) Gain rot ary con t rol t o

select t h e desired Solo Mode.

EQ/LO

GAIN

EQ/LO-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI

GAIN

FREQ

PAN

FREQ

PAN

FREQ

PAN

FREQ

PAN

SOLO MODE PARAMETER OPTIONS

PFL

Pre-Fader Listen mode (default setting)

Mix-solo mode

M-SOLO

VM200 User’s Guide

101

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Monitoring Signals

PFL: In PFL (Pre-Fader Listen ) m ode, th e VM200 feeds a soloed

ch an n el’s pre-fader sign al to th e Solo bu ss an d th en ou tpu ts it

on ly to th e MONITOR OUT an d PHONES.

Pressin g th e appropriate [SOLO] key en ables you to solo th e stereo

m aster or Rec Bu ss sign al before it is adju sted by th e Master

Fader or Rec Bu ss Gain param eter.

You can u se th is m ode to m on itor in dividu al in pu t sign als du rin g

a recordin g session to m ake isolated EQ adju stm en ts or to en su re

th at th e sign als are n ot clippin g.

You can solo in pu t ch an n els th at are tu rn ed off (i.e., th at h ave

th eir [ON] keys tu rn ed off).

M-Solo: In Mix-Solo m ode, th e VM200 feeds a soloed ch an n el to

th e stereo bu ss, an d th en ou tpu ts it to th e ST BUSS OUT, MONI-

TOR OUT, an d PHONES. You can solo on ly ch an n els th at are

rou ted to th e Stereo Bu ss.

Th e VM200 m u tes all ch an n els except th e ch an n el you select to

solo. (However, you can u se a Solo Safe fu n ction in th is m ode. For

m ore in form a t i on , see “S olo Sa f e F u n ction ” on page 104.)

In th is m ode, Master an d Rec Bu ss [SOLO] keys are disabled.

You can u se th is m ode to adju st in dividu al ch an n els du rin g m ix-

down .

5. Rot at e t h e ch an n el 7 / 8 (EQ/ HI) Gain rot ary con t rol t o select

a Solo Key m ode.

EQ/LO

GAIN

EQ/LO-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI

GAIN

FREQ

PAN

FREQ

PAN

FREQ

PAN

FREQ

PAN

SOLO KEY PARAMETER OPTIONS

In Latch mode, when you press a [SOLO] key, it remains

depressed, and the channel continues to solo until you

press the key again. This is the default setting.

LATCH

In Unlatch mode, when you press and hold a [SOLO] key, it

remains depressed, and the channel continues to solo

until you release the key.

UNLATCH

6. Press t h e [CHANNEL/ METER] or [EXIT] k ey.

Th e VM200 exits Setu p m ode an d displays th e CHANNEL EDIT fu n c-

tion page.

102

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Soloing

7. Wh en you ’re ready, press t h e [SOLO] k ey for t h e ch an n el(s) you

wish t o solo.

Th e selected [SOLO] keys ligh t u p.

Not e: Solo ch an n els take priority over th e sou rces you select u sin g th e

Mon Sel param eter.

Not e: Wh en ch an n els are con ﬁgu red as stereo pairs (“Pairin g Ch an n els”

on page 68), th eir [SOLO] keys are lin ked.

Not e: If Solo Mode is set to M-SOLO, you m u st raise th e fader for th e

soloed ch an n el an d th e Master fader or you will n ot h ear an y ou tpu t.

VM200 User’s Guide

103

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Monitoring Signals

Solo Safe Function

Th e VM200 featu res a Solo Safe fu n ction th at en ables you to desig-

n ate speciﬁc ch an n els as “solo safe.”

You can m on itor solo safe ch an n el sign als th at are sen t to th e stereo

bu ss regardless of th e ch an n el’s [SOLO] key statu s. Th is fu n ction is

available wh en Solo Mode is set to M-Solo (see page 98).

1. Press t h e Set u p [SYSTEM] k ey fou r t im es (from st art of cycle).

Th e VM200 displays th e SETUP:SYSTEM 4:SOLO SAFE fu n ction page. All

[EQ EDIT] keys ﬂash .

2. Select t h e desired ch an n el layer u sin g t h e [1 –8 ANALOG IN],

[9 –1 6 ADAT IN], an d [1 7 –2 0 EFF RTN] Page Select k eys an d press

t h e [EQ EDIT] k ey of t h e t arget ch an n els.

Th e [EQ EDIT] keys of th e solo safe ch an n els ligh t u p, th e [EQ

EDIT] keys of th e n on -solo safe ch an n els con tin u e to ﬂash .

Th e boxes of th e solo safe ch an n els are h igh ligh ted (dark) on th e

display.

In th e exam ple above, ch an n els 5 & 6 are design ated as “solo

safe” ch an n els. In th is case, pressin g th e ch an n el 1 [SOLO] key in

M-Solo m ode will en able you to m on itor n ot on ly th e ch an n el 1

sign al, bu t also th e ch an n els 5 & 6 sign als from th e stereo bu ss.

Oth er ch an n els will be m u ted.

3. Press t h e [EXIT] k ey or t h e [CHANNEL/ METER] k ey t o ret u rn t o

Ch an n el Edit m ode.

104

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Metering Signal Levels

You can view sign al level m eters for in pu t Ch an n els 1 th rou gh 20 on

th e CHANNEL EDIT/ INPUTS fu n ction page. You can display th is fu n ction

page by pressing the [CHANNEL/ METER] key.

Press the [CHANNEL/ METER] key again to display the CHANNEL EDIT/ OUT-

PUTS fu nction page. This page inclu des m eters for ADAT Ou ts, Stereo

Bu ss Ou t, Rec Bu ss Ou t, Au x Sends, and th e Effect Sends.

You can also m on itor in pu t ch an n el levels for in dividu al ch an n els on

th e correspon din g CH VIEW an d EQ EDIT fu n ction pages. (You can display

th ese pages by pressin g th e [CH VIEW] key or th e correspon din g [EQ

EDIT] key.)

Th e CH VIEW fu n ction page also displays graph ic faders an d n u m erical

valu es to in dicate th e level of th e AUX Sen ds an d th e Effect sen ds. See

“Viewin g In dividu al Ch an n el, A u x S en d, an d E f fect Sen d Meters” on

page 106 for m ore in fo r m at i on .

You can also m eter stereo ou tpu t levels by watch in g th e dedicated L/ R

or St Bu ss/ Solo LED m eters, wh ich are located to th e righ t of th e LCD

Display.

Th e LED m eters featu re overload (OL) in dicators, wh ich ligh t u p wh en

sign als clip. If th is h appen s, lower th e levels. Oth erwise th e sign al

m ay distort.

View ing Input/ Output Level Meters

1. Press t h e [CHANNEL/ METER] k ey (or t h e [EXIT] k ey in m ost

m odes).

Th e VM200 displays th e ﬁrst CHANNEL EDIT page, wh ich featu res

in pu t level m eters.

2. Press t h e [CHANNEL/ METER] bu t t on as desired t o t oggle

bet ween t h e in pu t level m et ers an d ou t pu t level m et ers.

CHANNEL EDIT/ INPUT function page (first press of Channel/Meter key)

CHANNEL EDIT/ OUTPUT function page (second press of Channel/Meter key)

VM200 User’s Guide

105

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Monitoring Signals

LED Display Meter (L/ R or ST BUSS/ SOLO)

Th e VM200 featu res two LED m eters to th e righ t of th e LCD Display

th at en able you to view stereo ou tpu t levels. Th ese n in e-segm en t

LED m eters display levels for th e left an d righ t ch an n els (L/ R) or th e

Stereo Bu ss an d soloin g ch an n els (St Bu ss/ Solo).

Th e m eters ran ge from –48 dB to OL (overload). Th e overload in dica-

tor ligh ts wh en th e sign al clips. If an OL LED ligh ts u p wh ile you are

m eterin g levels, redu ce th e stereo ou tpu t level to preven t sign al dis-

tortion .

View ing Individual Channel, Aux Send, and Effect Send Meters

1. Press t h e [CH VIEW] k ey.

Th e VM200 displays th e CH VIEW fu n ction page. [CH VIEW] key an d

all [EQ EDIT] keys ﬂash .

2. Select a t arget ch an n el layer by u sin g a Page Select k ey.

3. Press t h e t arget ch an n el’s [EQ EDIT] k ey.

Th e VM200 displays th e CH VIEW fu n ction page for th e corre-

spon din g ch an n el.

As you m ove th e faders, n otice h ow th e fader icon s m ove to in di-

cate th e fader position s.

CH VIEW function page for Channel 4

channel fader level Aux Send level

EFF Send level

106

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAX

MIN

CHAPTER 7

Outputs

EFF2

RECORDING MIXER

ORE

VM200

EFF EDIT

DIGIT

EFF1

EFF LIBRAR

RECALL

ORE

EQ ON

SELECTED EQ

EQ LIBRAR

-18

-24

REC BUSSSOLO

-36

-40

RECALL

ST BUSS/SOLO

About This Chapter

Th is ch apter describes th e ou tpu t con ﬁgu ration s of th e VM200,

SOLO

EXIT

EQ/HI

GAIN

in clu din g th e stereo bu ss ou tpu t, th e recordin g bu ss ou tpu t, th e

ADAT an d S/ P DIF digital ou tpu ts, an d th e au xiliary (AUX) sen ds.

EQ EDIT

17-20 EFF RTN

FREQ

SOLO

EQ EDIT

Chapter Contents

SOLO

GAIN

EQ/HI-MID

-10

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

-20

EQ EDIT

ADA

AGE SELECT

ST BUSS OUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

-30

9-16

-40

FREQ

SOLO

+10

REC BUSS OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

-60

A D A T O UT & S/ P DIF OUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

-10

EQ EDIT

AUX SEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

-20

SOLO

+10

-30

Usin g th e ST BUSS OUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

GAIN

EQ/LO-MID

-40

Mon itorin g th e ST BUSS OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

-10

EQ EDIT

Viewin g th e ST BUSS OUT Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

-20

FREQ

SOLO

Mu tin g th e ST BUSS OUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Soloin g th e ST BUSS OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

-30

-40

Settin g th e ST BUSS OUT L evel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

-10

EQ EDIT

-20

Usi

SOL

g th e REC BUSS OUT . . . .

+10

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

-30

-40

Mon itorin g th e REC BUSS OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

-10

EQ EDIT

Viewin g th e REC BUSS OUT Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

-20

Soloin g th e REC BUSS OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

SOLO

En ab l in g AUX Sen ds 3 & 4 (ADD. AUX P a ram eter) . . . . 115

Settin g th e REC BUSS OUT L evel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

-10

EQ EDIT

Usin g th e AUX Sen ds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

-20

SOLO

+10

Sen din g Ch an n el Sign als to A U X Sen ds . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Mon itorin g AUX Sen ds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

-10

Viewin g th e AUX Sen d an d Master Settin g . . . . . . . . . . 116

-20

+10

Viewin g Bu s s Rou tin g for Each Ch an n el . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Pre-f a der/ Post-f a der A U X Sen ds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

AIR/

-10

GROUP

Mu tin g AUX Sen ds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

-20

Pairin g AUX Sen ds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

METER

+10

CHANNEL/

-30

-40

Sm ooth in g Fu n ction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

MMC SEND

VM200 User’s Guide

107

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Outputs

Overview

Th e VM200 featu res several types of ou tpu ts, in clu din g th e stereo

bu ss ou tpu t, th e recordin g bu ss ou tpu t, th e ADAT an d S/ P DIF dig-

ital ou tpu ts, an d au xiliary (AUX) an d effect (EFF) sen ds.

You can con trol m u ch of th e sign al rou tin g by settin g param eters on

th e ROUTING fu n ction page. You can display th e ROUTING fu n ction page

by pressin g th e [ROUTING/ PHASE] key.

Th e Effect Sen d capabilities of th e VM200 are explain ed in m ore

detail in th e “Effects” ch apter page 123.

ST BUSS OUT

Th e VM200 con verts th e digital stereo bu ss (ST BUSS) sign al to an

an alog sign al u sin g 20-bit 128-tim es oversam plin g D/ A con verters.

It th en ou tpu ts it from th e ST BUSS OUT u n balan ced ph on e jack

(located on th e rear pan el) with a –10 dB n om in al ou tpu t level.

To ou tpu t sign als from th ese con n ectors, you n eed to rou te ch an n el

sign als to ST BUSS u sin g th e ROUTING fu n ction page, wh ich you can

access by pressin g th e [ROUTING/ PHASE] key. (See “In pu t Ch an n els”

on page 59.)

For m ore in form ation , see “Usin g th e ST BUSS OUT” on page 110.

ST BUSS OUT

REC BUSS OUT

Th e VM200 con verts th e digital stereo sign al ou tpu t from th e REC

BUSS to an an alog sign al u sin g 20-bit 128-tim es oversam plin g D/ A

con verters. Th e an alog sign al is th en ou tpu t from th e rear pan el via

th e REC BUSS OUT u n balan ced ph on e jacks with a –10 dB n om in al

ou tpu t level.

To ou tpu t sign als from th ese con n ectors, you n eed to rou te ch an n el

sign als to REC BUSS u sin g th e ROUTING fu n ction page accessed via

th e [ROUTING/ PHASE] key. (See “In pu t Ch an n els” on page 59.)

Th e sign als from th e REC BUSS are also rou ted to in pu t ch an n els

1–8. More speciﬁcally, th e left ch an n el sign als are rou ted to ch an n els

1, 3, 5, an d 7, an d th e righ t ch an n el sign als are rou ted to ch an n els

2, 4, 6, an d 8. You can th en rou te th e sign als directly to th e ADAT

OUTS 1–8. In th is way, you can ou tpu t two m ixes sim u ltan eou sly.

For m ore in form ation , see “Usin g th e REC BUSS OUT” on page 112.

REC BUSS OUT

ADD.AUX SEND

108

VM200 UserÕs Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADAT OUT & S/P DIF OUT

Not e: If th e ADD. AUX param eter is tu rn ed on , th e REC BUSS is

disabled. Fore m ore in form a t i on , see “E n ab l in g AUX Sen ds 3 & 4

(A D D. A U X Param eter )” o n page 115.

ADAT OUT & S/ P DIF OUT

You can ou tpu t digital stereo sign als from th e ADAT OUT an d S/ P

DIF OUT con n ectors.

You can con n ect an y ADAT-com patible recordin g device to th e ADAT

OUT optical con n ector, in clu din g a Fostex VR800 recorder, Alesis®

ADAT, Alesis ADAT-XT, or oth er digital m u ltitrack recorders.

Th e S/ P DIF OUT u ses an optical con n ector. You can u se th is to rou te

th e stereo sign al to an y S/ P DIF form at au dio device, su ch as a com -

pu ter sou n dcard or DAT recorder.

For m ore in form ation , see “Digital Con n ection s” on page 159.

S/P DIF

ADAT

OUT

ADAT and S/P DIF connections

AUX SEND

You can assign a sign al to AUX Sen ds 1 th rou gh 4. (AUX Sen ds 3 & 4

are available on ly wh en th e ADD. AUX param eter is tu rn ed on . For

m ore in form a t i on , see “E n ab l in g AUX Sen ds 3 & 4 (ADD. AUX

Param eter )” o n page 115.)

Th e AUX Sen ds provide addition al ou tpu ts th at you can u se for a vari-

ety of pu rposes. For exam ple, you can rou te a sign al ou t th e AUX

SENDS to an extern al DAT recorder, talkback system , or oth er appli-

cation .

You can con ﬁgu re ch an n el AUX Sen ds as pre-fader or post-fader

sen ds.

For m ore in form a t i on , see “U sin g th e A U X Sen ds” on page 115.

REC BUSS OUT

AUX SEND

AUX Sends 1–4

ADD.AUX SEND

VM200 User’s Guide

109

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Outputs

Using the ST BUSS OUT

Th e VM200 con verts th e ST BUSS stereo digital sign al to an alog

u sin g 20-bit 128-tim es oversam plin g D/ A con verters. Th e an alog sig-

n al is th en ou tpu t from th e ST BUSS OUT con n ectors on th e rear

pan el. Th ese con n ectors are u n balan ced ph on e jacks with a –10 dB

n om in al ou tpu t level.

Th e sam e ST BUSS stereo digital sign al is also con verted to an S/ P

DIF sign al via th e S/ P DIF en coder an d ou tpu t from th e S/ P DIF OUT

con n ector on th e rear pan el. (For m ore in form ation , see “Usin g S/ P

DIF OUT” on page 168.)

In a typical recordin g setu p, you cou ld u se th e ST BUSS OUT for m as-

ter recordin g.

Monitoring the ST BUSS OUT

You can m on itor th e ST BUSS OUT sign al by con n ectin g th e MONI-

TOR OUT jacks to an am pliﬁer an d speakers. Set th e Mon Sel (Mon -

itor Select) param eter on th e SETUP:SYSTEM 1:CLOCK/ MON fu n ction page

to “ST-B” (stereo bu ss) (see page 98).

You can also m on itor th e ST BUSS OUT sign al th rou gh a pair of ste-

reo h eadph on es con n ected to th e PHONES jack. For m ore in form a-

tion , see “Mon itorin g Sign als” on page 97.

View ing the ST BUSS OUT Meters

You can view th e stereo ou tpu t sign al levels on th e n in e-segm en t

L/ R Stereo/ Solo LED m eters.

You can also view th e stereo ou tpu t level on m eters th at appear on

th e CHANNEL EDIT/ OUTPUTS fu n ction page, wh ich you can display by

pressin g th e [CHANNEL/ METER] key twice.

LED meters

METER

ST BUSS OUT level

-3

-6

-9

-12

-18

-24

-36

-48

ST BUSS/SOLO

See th e “Mon itorin g Sign als” on page 97 for m ore in form ation .

110

VM200 UserÕs Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Soloing the ST BUSS OUT

You can solo th e sign al ou tpu t from th e ST BUSS by pressin g th e

[SOLO] key on th e Master ch an n el. Th e Master [SOLO] key ligh ts u p.

Th e Master [SOLO] key works on ly wh en Solo m ode is set to PFL,

wh ich is th e defau lt settin g. If Solo m ode is set to M-Solo, th e Master

[SOLO] key is disabled. For m ore in form ation on Solo m ode, see

page 101.

If you set th e Solo Key param eter to LATCH, pressin g th e [SOLO] key

solos th e stereo ou tpu t u n til you press th e [SOLO] key again . If th e

param eter is set to UNLATCH, th e stereo ou tpu t will solo on ly u n til

you release th e Master [SOLO] key.

Setting the ST BUSS OUT Level

You con trol th e stereo ou tpu t level u sin g th e Master fader.

Sin ce th e Master fader can also con -

SOLO

trol th e Au x an d Effects Sen d m aster

Master SOLO key

levels, depen din g on th e Fader Mode,

you n eed to press th e [CHANNEL] key

Master ON key

before you can adju st th e stereo ou t-

pu t level. Th is places th e VM200 in

Ch an n el Fader Mode, en ablin g th e

Master fader to con trol th e stereo ou t-

pu t level.

See “Faders” on page 32 for m ore

-10

in form ation .

-20

-30

-40

Muting the ST BUSS OUT

-60

Master Fader

You can m u te th e stereo ou tpu t by

tu rn in g off th e [ON] key for th e Mas-

ter ch an n el. Th e [ON] key ligh ts u p

wh en stereo ou tpu t is on . Tu rn in g off

MASTER

th e [ON] key m u tes th e stereo bu ss

ou tpu t.

Sin ce th e Master [ON] key can also m u te th e Au x an d Effects Sen d

m aster ou tpu ts, depen din g on th e Fader Mode, you m ay n eed to press

th e [CHANNEL] key to place th e VM200 in Ch an n el Fader Mode before

you can m u te th e stereo bu ss ou tpu t.

Th is places th e VM200 in Ch an n el Fader Mode, en ablin g th e Master

[ON] key to m u te th e stereo ou tpu t.

See “[ON] Keys” on page 34 for m ore in form ation .

VM200 User’s Guide

111

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Outputs

Using the REC BUSS OUT

Th e VM200 con verts th e REC BUSS stereo sign al to an alog u sin g

20-bit 128-tim es oversam plin g D/ A con verters. Th e an alog sign al is

th en ou tpu t from th e REC BUSS OUT con n ectors on th e rear pan el.

Th ese con n ectors are u n balan ced ph on e jacks with a –10 dB n om in al

ou tpu t level.

Th e REC BUSS also sen ds th e left sign al to ch an n els 1, 3, 5, an d 7,

an d th e righ t sign al to ch an n els 2, 4, 6, an d 8 so th at you can rou te

th em to ADAT OUT 1–8 directly. Th is con ﬁgu ration en ables you to

sen d two m ixes to two differen t extern al recorders at th e sam e tim e

(assu m in g on e recorder is ADAT-com patible). (For m ore in form ation

on ADAT OUT con n ection s, see “Digital Con n ection s” on page 159.)

Not e: If th e ADD. AUX param eter is on , th e REC BUSS is disabled.

Fore m ore in form ation , see “En ablin g AUX Sen ds 3 & 4 (ADD. AUX

Param eter)” on page 115.

Monitoring the REC BUSS OUT

You can m on itor th e REC BUSS OUT sign al by con n ectin g th e MON-

ITOR OUT jacks to an am pliﬁer an d speakers. Set th e Mon Sel (Mon -

itor Select) param eter on th e SETUP:SYSTEM 1:CLOCK/ MON page to

“REC-B” (see page 98).

You can also m on itor th e REC BUSS OUT sign al th rou gh a pair of ste-

reo h eadph on es con n ected to th e PHONES jack. For m ore in form a-

tion , see “Mon itorin g Sign als” on page 97.

View ing the REC BUSS OUT Meters

You can view th e REC BUSS OUT level on m eters th at appear on th e

CHANNEL EDIT/ OUTPUTS fu n ction page. You can display th is fu n ction

page by pressin g th e [CHANNEL/ METER] key twice.

See th e “Mon itorin g” ch apter on page 97 for m ore in form ation .

REC BUSS OUT meter

112

VM200 UserÕs Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Soloing the REC BUSS OUT

You can solo th e sign al ou tpu t from th e REC BUSS by pressin g th e

REC BUSS [SOLO] key (located n ext to th e Master [SOLO] key). Th e

Rec Bu ss [SOLO] key ligh ts u p. Th e Rec Bu ss [SOLO] key works on ly

wh en Solo m ode is set to PFL, wh ich is th e defau lt settin g. If Solo

m ode is set to M-Solo, th e Rec Bu ss [SOLO] key is disabled. For m ore

in form ation on Solo m ode, see page 101.

If you set th e Solo Key param eter to LATCH, pressin g th e Rec Bu ss

[SOLO] key solos th e stereo ou tpu t u n til you press th e Rec Bu ss [SOLO]

key again . If th e param eter is set to UNLATCH, th e Rec Bu ss ou tpu t

will solo on ly u n til you release th e Rec Bu ss [SOLO] key.

REC BUSS

SOLO

REC BUSS SOLO key

Setting the REC BUSS OUT Level

You can set th e Rec Bu ss ou tpu t level on th e CURRENT SCENE STATUS

fu n ction page.

^1.Press t h e [CURRENT SCENE STATUS] k ey.

Th e VM200 displays th e CURRENT SCENE STATUS fu n ction page.

^2.Rot at e t h e EQ/ HI Gain rot ary con t rol (ch an n els 7 / 8 ) t o adju st

t h e REC-B GAIN param et er.

Th e REC-B GAIN param eter con trols th e Rec Bu ss Ou t level.

VM200 User’s Guide

113

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Outputs

You can adju st th e level (-∞, -90 to 0dB) in 128 in crem en ts. Th e

defau lt settin g is 0dB.

EQ/LO

GAIN

EQ/LO-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI

GAIN

FREQ

PAN

FREQ

PAN

FREQ

PAN

FREQ

PAN

Not e: If you try to operate th e Gain rotary control wh ile th e ADD.AUX

param eter is tu rn ed ON, th e VM200 displays a warn in g m essage an d you

will be u n able to adju st the REC-B Gain . Use th e EQ/ LO-MID Gain rotary

con trol (ch an n els 3/ 4) to tu rn off th e ADD.AUX param eter on th e CURRENT

SCENE STATUS fu n ction page.

114

VM200 UserÕs Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using the AUX Sends

Th e VM200 featu res fou r au xiliary (AUX) sen ds, wh ich en able you to

sen d a sign als to variou s destin ation s. You can sen d sign als from

in pu t ch an n els 1 th rou gh 20 to AUX Sen ds 1 th rou gh 4. You can u se

th e fou r AUX Sen ds in dividu ally or in stereo pairs.

REC BUSS OUT

AUX SEND

AUX Sends 1–4

ADD.AUX SEND

You can con ﬁgu re each ch an n el AUX Sen d as a pre-fader or

post-fader sen d.

AUX Sen ds 1 th rou gh 4 sign als are rou ted to th e AUX SEND 1

th rou gh 4 jacks respectively. (AUX 3 & 4 are available on ly if you tu rn

on th e ADD.AUX param eter, as described below.)

Th e VM200 also featu res a Sm ooth in g fu n ction th at redu ces CPU load

to ach ieve sm ooth er fader adju stm en t.

Th e VM200 does n ot in clu de dedicated AUX retu rn in pu ts. Use th e

in sert ch an n els to retu rn AUX sign als. For m ore in form ation , see

“In sert Ch an n els 1–4” on page 62.

Enabling AUX Sends 3 & 4 (ADD. AUX Param eter)

If you wish to u se AUX Sen ds 3 & 4, you m u st tu rn on th e ADD. AUX

param eter on th e CURRENT SCENE STATUS fu n ction page.

^1.Press t h e [CURRENT SCENE STATUS] k ey.

Th e VM200 displays th e CURRENT SCENE STATUS fu n ction page.

ADD.AUX parameter

2. Rot at e t h e EQ/ LO-MID Gain con t rol t o t u rn on t h e ADD.AUX

param et er.

Th e ON in dicator in th e ADD. AUX param eter ﬁeld ﬂash es.

^3.Press t h e [ENTER] k ey t o con ﬁ rm t h e ch an ge.

^4.Press t h e [EXIT] k ey t o display t h e CHANNEL EDIT fu n ct ion page.

Not e: Wh en th e ADD.AUX param eter is tu rn ed on , th e REC BUSS OUT

jacks fu n ction as AUX Sen ds 3 an d 4, an d th e REC BUSS OUT rou tin g

is disabled.

VM200 User’s Guide

115

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Outputs

Monitoring AUX Sends

You can m on itor th e REC BUSS OUT sign al by con n ectin g th e MON-

ITOR OUT jacks to an am pliﬁer an d speakers. Set th e Mon Sel (Mon -

itor Select) param eter on th e 1:CLOCK/ MON page to AUX1, AUX2,

AUX3, or AUX4 (see page 98).

You can also m on itor th e REC BUSS OUT sign al th rou gh a pair of ste-

reo h eadph on es con n ected to th e PHONES jack. For m ore in form a-

tion , see “Mon itorin g Sign als” on page 97.

View ing the AUX Send and Master Setting

You can view th e AUX Sen d level an d sen d m aster level on m eters

th at appear on th e CH VIEW fu n ction page an d th e Ch an n el Edit/ Ou t-

pu ts fu n ction page respectively.

To view th e AUX Sen d level, press th e [CH VIEW] key to display th e

1:CH VIEW fu n ction page, press a Page Select key to select th e desired

ch an n el layer, an d press th e [EQ EDIT] key for th e Au x Sen d ch an n el.

You can display th e CHANNEL EDIT/ OUTPUTS fu n ction page to view th e

AUX Sen d m aster level by pressin g th e [CHANNEL/ METER] key twice.

See “Mon itorin g Sign als” on page 97 for m ore in form ation .

116

VM200 UserÕs Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sending Channel Signals to AUX Sends

You can sen d sign als from in pu t ch an n els 1 th rou gh 20 to AUX Sen ds

1 th rou gh 4.

If th e AUX Sen d is con ﬁgu red post-fader (see “Pre-fader/ Post-fader

AUX Sen ds” below), ﬁrst raise th e ch an n el’s regu lar fader l prior to

step 1 by pressin g th e [CHANNEL] bu tton , an d th en raisin g th e fader.

^1.In t h e Fader Mode sect ion , press t h e [AUX1 ], [AUX2 ], [AUX3 ], or

[AUX4 ] k ey t o select an AUX Sen d.

Th e faders n ow fu n ction as ch an n el AUX Sen d con trols for th e

selected AUX Sen d.

Not e: If th e ADD. AUX param eter is on , th e REC BUSS is disabled. Fore

m ore in form a t i on , see “E n ab l in g AUX Sen ds 3 & 4 (ADD. AUX P a ram e-

ter)” on page 115.

^2.Raise t h e fader of t h e ch an n el you wan t t o sen d t o t h e AUX

Sen d.

^3.Use t h e Mast er fader t o adju st t h e AUX Sen ds m ast er level.

Wh en ch an n els are con ﬁgu red as stereo pairs th eir AUX Sen d

con trols are lin ked. (See “Pairin g Ch an n els” on page 68).

Not e: If th e Sm ooth in g fu n ction is set to Level 2 (defau lt), AUX1 an d EFF1

are lin ked, an d AUX2 an d EFF2 are lin ked. Th erefore, settin g th e AUX1

level also sets EFF1 to th e sam e level; sim ilarly, settin g th e AUX2 level

sets EFF2 to th e sam e level. If th e Sm ooth in g fu n ction is set to Level 1,

you m ay h ear a sligh t steppin g n oise wh en you m ove th e fader. For m ore

in form ation on th e Sm ooth in g fu n ction , see “Sm ooth in g Fu n ction ” on

page 120.

Pre-fader/ Post-fader AUX Sends

You can con ﬁgu re each AUX Sen d as pre-fader or post-fader by

adju stin g param eters on th e CURRENT SCENE STATUS fu n ction page.

Pre-fader sign als do n ot pass th rou gh th e ch an n el faders an d are

th erefore u n affected by ch an n el fader settin gs. Post-fader sign als

pass th rou gh th e ch an n el faders an d are affected by ch an n el fader

settin gs.

Follow th ese steps to con ﬁgu re each AUX Sen d as pre-fader or

post-fader.

1. Press t h e [CURRENT SCENE STATUS] k ey.

Th e VM200 displays th e CURRENT SCENE STATUS fu n ction page.

pre-fader/post-fader AUX Sends

VM200 User’s Guide

117

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Outputs

^2.Use t h e Freq an d Q rot ary con t rols for ch an n els 1 –4 t o select

PRE or POST for AUX1 , AUX2 , AUX3 , an d AUX4 .

Th e defau lt settin g is POST.

Wh en you ch an ge th e settin g, th e selected valu e ﬂash es.

^3.Press t h e [EXIT] k ey t o display t h e CHANNEL EDIT fu n ct ion page.

Muting AUX Sends

You can m u te th e AUX Sen d Masters by tu rn in g off th e [ON] key for

th e Master ch an n el.

Sin ce th e Master [ON] key can also m u te th e Stereo Bu ss an d Effects

Sen d m aster ou tpu ts, depen din g on th e Fader Mode, you n eed to

press th e [AUX1], [AUX2], [AUX3], or [AUX4] key to select an AUX Sen d

before you can m u te it.

^1.Press t h e [AUX1 ], [AUX2 ], [AUX3 ], or [AUX4 ] k ey t o select an AUX

Sen d.

Th e selected AUX key ﬂash es.

^2.Use t h e MASTER [ON] bu t t on t o t u rn t h e AUX Sen d on an d off.

Wh en AUX Sen ds are con ﬁgu red as stereo pairs, th eir [ON] bu tton s

are lin ked (see “Pairin g Ch an n els” on page 68).

See “[ON] Keys” on page 34 for m ore in form ation .

SOLO

Master ON key

118

VM200 UserÕs Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pairing AUX Sends

You can pair AUX Sen ds 1 an d 2 an d AUX Sen ds 3 an d 4 for stereo

sign al processin g.

Wh en paired, th e Master Faders, [ON] keys, an d m on itors of each AUX

Sen d are set th e sam e an d lin ked for sim u ltan eou s con trol.

Follow th ese steps to pair AUX Sen ds:

^1.Press t h e [CURRENT SCENE STATUS] k ey.

Th e VM200 displays th e CURRENT SCENE STATUS fu n ction page.

AUX PAIR parameters

^2.Use t h e Freq an d Q rot ary con t rols for ch an n els 7 / 8 t o t u rn

t h e A1 &A2 an d A3 &4 param et ers On or Off.

Th e defau lt settin g is “off.”

If you ch an ge th e param eter settin g, th e in dicator ﬂash es.

^3.Press t h e [EXIT] k ey t o ret u rn t o Ch an n el Edit m ode.

Not e: If th e ADD. AUX param eter is on , th e REC BUSS is disabled. For

m ore in form ation , see “En ablin g AUX Sen ds 3 & 4 (ADD. AUX Param e-

ter)” on page 115.

Not e: Wh en AUX1 an d 2 are paired, th e AUX1 sign al is sen t to th e left

ch an n el an d AUX2 sign al is sen t to th e righ t. Sim ilarly, wh en AUX3 an d

4 are paired, th e AUX3 sign al is sen t to th e left ch an n el an d th e AUX4

sign al is sen t to th e righ t ch an n el.

Not e: If th e Sm ooth in g fu n ction is set to Level 2 (defau lt), th e AUX pair

settin g will affect th e EFF pair settin g. For m ore in form ation on th e

Sm ooth in g fu n ction , see “Sm ooth in g Fu n ction ” on page 120.

VM200 UserÕs Guide

119

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Outputs

Sm oothing Function

Depen din g on th e sou n d you are m ixin g, you m ay h ear a sligh t step-

pin g n oise wh en you slide th e faders. Th is in dicates an overloaded

CPU. To resolve th is problem , th e VM200 featu res a Sm ooth in g fu n c-

tion th at redu ces CPU load to ach ieve sm ooth er fader adju stm en t.

Wh en th e Sm ooth in g fu n ction is set to Level 2, AUX1 an d EFF1 are

lin ked an d AUX2 an d EFF2 are lin ked. Th erefore, th e level settin gs,

pair settin gs, an d pan settin gs for AUX Sen d 1 an d AUX Sen d 2 will

be applied to th e level settin gs, pair settin gs, an d pan settin gs for

EFF1 an d EFF2. However, fader operation will be m u ch ﬁn er.

Follow th e steps below to set th e Sm ooth in g fu n ction . Th e defau lt set-

tin g is Sm ooth in g “LEVEL 2.”

^1.Press t h e [CURRENT SCENE STATUS] k ey.

Th e VM200 displays th e CURRENT SCENE STATUS fu n ction page.

Smoothing parameter

^2.Use t h e EQ/ HI-MID Gain rot ary con t rol t o t oggle bet ween

Level1 an d Level2 .

Level 1: AUX Sen ds 1/ 2 an d EFF Sen ds 1/ 2 are n ot lin ked, bu t

th e faders’ sm ooth in g fu n ction m ay be coarse, an d depen din g on

th e sou n d, you m ay h ear a sligh t steppin g n oise wh en you slide

th e faders in AUX Sen d m ode.

Level 2: AUX Sen d 1 an d EFF Sen d 1 are lin ked, an d AUX Sen d 2

an d EFF Sen d 2 are lin ked. Th e level settin gs, pair settin g, an d

pan settin g for AUX Sen d 1 an d AUX Sen d 2 will be applied to th e

level settin gs, pair settin gs, an d pan settin gs for EFF1 an d EFF2.

However, fader operation will be m u ch sm ooth er an d you sh ou ld

n ot h ear an y n oise.

Not e: If th e EQ En able param eter in th e CURRENT SCENE STATUS page is set

to “1–16,” th e Sm ooth in g fu n ction rem ain s Level 2 even if you can ch an ge

to Level 1 on th e display.

^3.Press t h e [ENTER] k ey t o con ﬁ rm t h e set t in g.

120

VM200 UserÕs Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing Buss Routing for Each Channel

View ing Buss Routing for Each Channel

Th e CH VIEW fu n ction page in clu des a ROUT display th at in dicates

wh eth er th e speciﬁed ch an n el is rou ted to th e ADAT Direct Ou ts, th e

Stereo Bu ss, or th e Record Bu ss.

1. Press t h e [CH VIEW] k ey.

2. Press t h e [EQ EDIT] k ey for t h e desired ch an n el.

Th e VM200 displays th e 1:CH VIEW fu n ction page, wh ich in clu des

th e ROUT in dicator in th e top cen ter of th e display.

Th e D, R, an d S in dicators represen t th e ADAT Direct Ou ts, th e

Record Bu ss, an d th e Stereo Bu ss. A h igh ligh ted (dark) in dicator

m ean s th e ch an n el is bein g sen t to th e speciﬁed bu ss.

ROUT D, R, S indicator

VM200 User’s Guide

121

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Outputs

122

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAX

MIN

CHAPTER 8

Effects

EFF2

RECORDING MIXER

ORE

VM200

EFF EDIT

DIGIT

EFF1

EFF LIBRAR

RECALL

ORE

EQ ON

SELECTED EQ

EQ LIBRAR

-18

-24

REC BUSSSOLO

-36

-40

RECALL

ST BUSS/SOLO

About This Chapter

Th is ch apter describes h ow to apply th e VM200 in tern al effects to

SOLO

EXIT

EQ/HI

GAIN

th e sign als, an d h ow to recall, store, an d edit th e program s in th e

Effects library.

EQ EDIT

17-20 EFF RTN

Th is ch apter also in clu des a com plete effects param eter list.

FREQ

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

GAIN

EQ/HI-MID

Chapter Contents

-10

-20

EQ EDIT

ADA

AGE SELECT

-30

9-16

VM200 Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

-60

-40

FREQ

SOLO

+10

Effects Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

E f fect Preset Library List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

-10

EQ EDIT

Applyin g Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

-20

SOLO

+10

-30

GAIN

EQ/LO-MID

-40

Selectin g an E f fects Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Settin g Effects Retu rn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

-10

EQ EDIT

Sen din g Sign al to E f fects Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

FREQ

SOLO

+10

-30

-40

Rou tin g Effects Retu rn s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Con trollin g th e Sen ds Sign als . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

EQ EDIT

Pre-f a der/ Post-f a der E f fect Sen ds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

SOLO

+10

-30

Viewin g a n d A d j u s t i n g th e Effect Sen d Level . . . . . . . . . 130

Viewin g a n d A d j u s t i n g th e Effect Sen d Master Level . . . 131

EQ EDIT

Mu tin g Effect Sen ds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

-20

SOLO

+10

-30

-40

Mon itorin g Effects Sen ds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Con trollin g th e Retu rn Sign als . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

-10

EQ EDIT

Settin g th e Effect Retu rn Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

-20

SOLO

+10

-30

Pan n in g Effects Retu rn s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

-40

Effects Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Editin g Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Recallin g Effects Program s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

+10

-30

AIR/

Storin g E f fects Program s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

GROUP

Ed i tin g Effect Program Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

METER

+10

CHANNEL/

-30

Effects Param eters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

MMC SEND

VM200 User’s Guide

123

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Effects

VM200 Effects

Th e VM200 featu res two on -board stereo m u lti-effects processors

(EFF1, EFF2) that provide a wide range of high -qu ality effects, inclu d-

ing reverbs, delays, choru ses, ﬂan gers, and m ore.

Th ese in tern al effect processors u se A.S.P. (Fostex Advan ced Sign al

Processin g Tech n ology, developed exclu sively by Fostex). Th is tech -

n ology extracts m axim u m efﬁcien cy from lim ited DSP power. It

ach ieves an overwh elm in gly h igh -den sity Early Reﬂection sou n d an d

a sm ooth High Du m p respon se th rou gh th e application of H.F.A.

(Harm on ic Feedback Algorith m ). Fu rth erm ore, it carries ou t an elab-

orate reverb sim u lation to create clear sou n ds th rou gh H.D.L.P.

(Hi-Den sity Logarith m ic Processin g), wh ich elim in ates th e m u tu al

in terferen ce between th e n u m erou s in tegrated delay m odu les an d

redu ces son ic im pu rities an d “grit.”

Th e VM200 in clu des an Effects Library th at con tain s 50 Preset pro-

gram s an d 50 User program s. See th e “Effects Library” on page 125

for m ore in form ation .

You can recall an d edit an y Preset or User program to create a n ew

effect, th en store it in an y User program location .

You can load differen t effect program s to processors EFF1 an d EFF2

an d rou te sign als th rou gh eith er as desired.

To recall an effect, press th e EFF1 or EFF2 to specify th e processor

you wish to u se. Th en press th e Recall key an d select th e effect from

th e library. (See “Recallin g Effects Program s” on page 134.)

To edit an effect, press th e EFF1 or EFF2 key to display th e EFF1 or

EFF2 fu n ction pages, wh ich in clu de th e n am e an d n u m ber of th e

selected effect an d a set of param eters associated with th e effect. You

can adju st th e param eters u sin g th e rotary con trols (Gain , Freq, Q).

(See “Editin g Effects” on page 133.)

Effect bu sses 1 an d 2 feed effects processors 1 an d 2 respectively.

Processed sign als retu rn to ch an n els 17–20.

You m ay apply effects to in pu t ch an n els 1–20.

You can also store effects selection in Scen e Mem ory.

124

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Effects Library

Th e VM200 also in clu des an Effects Library th at con tain s 50 Preset

program s an d 50 User program s.

Effect Preset Library List

Th e followin g table lists th e Preset effect program s. See “Effects

Param eters” on page 139 f or d etailed param eter in f o rm ation .

Reverb effects

Name

Display

Description

Normal Large

Hall

Conventional large hall, with sonic detail, clarity,

and an appropriate amount of early reﬂections.

NomL.Hall

Lo-Freq Large

Hall

Large hall with lingering low-frequency reverb

components.

LowL.Hall

Presence Large

Hall

PrsL.HALL

Reverb with crispness and good presence.

Reverb with restrained high-frequency range and

gentle character.

03 Wet Large Hall

04 Stadium

WetL.HALL

STADIUM

NomS.Hall

Stadium reverb with many long early reﬂections.

Normal Small

Conventional small hall, with sonic detail, clarity,

and an appropriate amount of early reﬂections.

Hall

Lo-Freq Small

Hall

Small hall with lingering low-frequency reverb

components.

LowS.HALL

PrsS.HALL

WetS.HALL

NoER.HALL

Nom.ROOM

GARAGE

Presence Small

Hall

General-purpose small hall with crisp sound and

few early reﬂections.

Small hall with little high-frequency range and

calming effects.

08 Wet Small Hall

09 No-E/R Hall

10 Normal Room

11 Garage

Small hall with no early reﬂections, and the entire

frequency range decays in the same way.

Conventional room reverb simulating a nice space

with just enough “sparkle.”

Room reverb with crisp presence simulating a

small, live space such as a garage.

Room reverb simulating a small, dead room. Add

12 Dead Room

Dead.ROOM just a bit of this to give warmth to a sound. Ideal

for narrations.

All-purpose room reverb with few early reﬂections

and good deﬁnition.

13 Presence Room

14 Drum_Booth

15 Normal Plate

Prs.ROOM

Dr.BOOTH

Room reverb simulating a drum booth.

Contemporary-feeling plate reverb with a wide

bandwidth.

Nom.PLATE

Conventional plate reverb with the character of

classic plate devices.

16 Old Plate

Old.PLATE

17 Presence Plate

18 Wet Plate

Prs.PLATE

Wet.PLATE

Crisp plate reverb with extended highs.

Plate reverb with a gentle character.

Plate reverb emphasizing a digital feel, with metal-

lic-sounding early reﬂection.

19 Digital Plate

DigiPLATE

VM200 User’s Guide

125

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Effects

Name

Display

Description

The early reﬂections of an ideal vocal booth plus

short reverberation with extended high range.This

adds sparkle to the sound, and is effective when

you want to make the vocal stand out in the

ensemble.

Presence Vocal

Booth

PVo.BOOTH

The early reﬂections of an ideal vocal booth plus

gentle short reverberation. This adds a natural

feeling of air, and is effective with simple arrange-

ments with an unhurried vocal.

Natural Vocal

Booth

NVo.BOOTH

All-around reverb that makes any vocal sound

great.

22 Vocal Reverb

23 Solo Vocal

Vo.REVERB

Solo.VO

Spacious short delay plus a reverb with a real

plate character. Blends naturally into any back-

ground.

Spacious stadium-type early reﬂections plus short

reverberation with extended high range. Good for

chorus parts.

24 Arena Vocal

Arena VO

Early Reﬂection-type Reverbs

Name

Display

Description

Normal Gate

Reverb

Nom.GATE

Standard gate reverb

Lo-Freq Mono

Kick Gate

Gate reverb tuned for kick drums, with pan set to

the center.

MnBD.GATE

StSD.GATE

Hi-Freq Stereo

Snare Gate

Gate reverb tuned for snare drums and percussion

28 Hall E/R

Hall.ER

Simulation of early reﬂections in a large hall.

Simulation of early reﬂections in a room.

Simulation of early reﬂections of a spring reverb.

29 Room E/R

30 Spring E/R

31 Random E/R

32 Reverse E/R

Room.ER

Spring.ER

Random.ER Random early reﬂections.

Reverse.ER

Reversed early reﬂections of a hall reverb.

Delays

Name

Display

Description

Mono delay with longer delay time, which can cre-

ate special effects using HPF and LPF.

33 Mono Delay

MonoDELAY

34 Pan Delay

35 Dual Delay

Pan.DELAY

DualDELAY

Panning delay that pans sound left to right.

Two independent delays.

3-tap delay, which can create interesting effects

with your wizardry.

36 3ch Delay

3ch.DELAY

Modulation effects

Name

Display

Description

37 Chorus

CHORUS

Standard chorus effect setting.

38 3D Chorus

3D.CHORUS More natural and spacious effects than Chorus.

Standard ﬂanging effect setting.You can pan two

FLANGE

39 Flange

types of effects sound to any position.

126

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Effect Preset Library List

Pitch Changer

Name

Display

Description

40 Mono PitCh

MonoPITCH

Standard pitch shifter.

Stereo pitch shift with two channels pitch-shifted

independently.

41 Dual PitCh

DualPITCH

Multi-effects

Name

Display

Description

Mono Delay

-Normal Hall

MnDL-NmHL Combination of mono delay and hall reverb.

MnDL-NmPL Combination of mono delay and plate reverb.

PnDL-NmHL Combination of pan delay and hall reverb.

PnDL-NmPL Combination of pan delay and plate reverb.

CHORS-REV An effect which adds reverb to chorus.

REV-CHORS An effect which adds chorus to reverb.

Mono Delay

-Normal Plate

Panning Delay

-Normal Hall

Panning Delay

-Normal Plate

CHORUS-

REVERB

REVERB-

CHORUS

FLANGE-

REVERB

FLG-REV

REV-FLG

An effect which adds reverb to ﬂange.

An effect which adds ﬂange to reverb.

REVERB

-FLANGE

VM200 User’s Guide

127

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Effects

Applying Effects

To apply an effect, you m u st do two th in gs:

❑ rou te th e sign al to on e of two effects processors, an d

❑ retu rn th e processed sign al back to th e m ix.

Th e followin g section s explain th ese tasks.

Not e: Wh en EQ En able param eter is set to “EQ1–16,” both effects proces-

sors are disabled. For m ore in form ation , see “EQ En ablin g Ch an n els” on

page 80.

Selecting an Effects Processor

^1.Press t h e [CHANNEL/ METER] k ey.

Th e VM200 displays th e CHANNEL EDIT fu n ction page.

^2.Ch eck t h e in pu t ch an n el, t u rn on t h e [ON] k ey, an d raise t h e

fader for t h e ch an n el.

^3.Press t h e [EFF1 ] or [EFF2 ] k ey in t h e Eff Edit sect ion t o select

an effect s processor.

Th e selected key ligh ts u p an d th e VM200 displays th e EFF EDIT

fu n ction page, wh ich in clu des param eters for th e cu rren t effect.

^4.Recall t h e desired effect s program from t h e Effect s Library.

(For m ore in form ation on h ow to recall th e effects program , see

“Recallin g Effects Program s” on page 134.)

Setting Effects Return

Before you sen d a sign al to an effects processor, you m u st set u p a

rou tin g path to retu rn it to th e m ix so it can be m on itored an d ou tpu t.

Follow th e steps below:

^5.Press t h e [CHANNEL/ METER] k ey, t h en t h e [1 7 –2 0 EFF RTN]

k ey.

Th e [17–20 EFF RTN] key ligh ts u p.

128

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sending Signal to Effects Processor

^6.Lower t h en raise t h e faders t h at correspon d t o t h e effect you

are u sin g for ret u rn sign als. Mak e su re t h e correspon din g

ch an n el [ON] k ey is t u rn ed on .

(Ch an n els 17 & 18 faders con trol th e EFF1 processor; ch an n els

19 & 20 faders con trol EFF2.)

You m u st lower th en raise th e fader to set th e in itial retu rn level.

(See “Faders” on page 32 for m ore in form ation .)

^7.Adju st t h e PAN con t rol for t h e effect s ret u rn ch an n el if you

desire.

Sending Signal to Effects Processor

^8.Press t h e [1 –8 ANALOG IN] Page Select k ey.

Th e [17–20 EFF RTN] key LED tu rn s off an d th e [1–8 ANALOG IN]

Page Select key ligh ts u p.

^9.Press t h e [EFF1 ] k ey in t h e Fader Mode sect ion . (If you are

u sin g t h e EFF2 processor, press t h e [EFF2 ] k ey.)

Th e [EFF1] key ﬂash es oran ge an d th e [AUX1] key ﬂash es red in th e

Fader Mode section .

^10.Lower t h en raise t h e fader for t h e ch an n el you wish t o rou t e

t o t h e effect s processor. Th en lower an d raise t h e Mast er fader

t o set t h e desired effect s sen d sign al level.

Th is sen ds th e ch an n el sign al to th e selected effects processor.

Th e effects sen d m eter in th e CH VIEW fu n ction page displays th e

level of th e effects sen d sign al, in dicatin g th at sign als are bein g fed

to th e selected effects processor. As you raise th e faders, you

sh ou ld h ear m ore of th e effect sou n d.

If in pu t ch an n els are paired, th eir effect sen d con trols will be

lin ked.

You can edit an d store effects settin gs. Refer to “Storin g Effects

Program s” on page 135 f or m ore in fo r m at i on .

Not e: If you set th e Sm ooth in g fu n ction to Level 2 (defau lt), AUX1 an d

EFF1 are lin ked, an d AUX2 an d EFF2 are lin ked. Th erefore, settin g th e

EFF1 level will set AUX1 to th e sam e level. Sim ilarly, settin g th e EFF2 level

sets AUX2 to th e sam e level. If th e Sm ooth in g fu n ction is set to Level 1, you

m ay h ear a sligh t steppin g n oise wh en you m ove th e fader. For m ore in for -

m ation , see “Sm ooth in g Fu n ction ” on page 120.

Routing Effects Returns

On ce you ’ve rou ted a sign al to an effects processor an d retu rn ed it to

th e m ix as described in th e precedin g section s, you can rou te it to sev-

eral destin ation s.

You can rou te Effects retu rn s to th e stereo bu ss (ST BUSS) or th e

recordin g bu ss (REC BUSS). See “Rou tin g In pu t Ch an n els” on

page 66 for m ore in form ation .

You can also rou te sign als to AUX Sen ds 1 th rou gh 4. (Note th at th e

REC BUSS OUT is disabled if AUX Sen ds 3 an d 4 are selected).

VM200 User’s Guide

129

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Effects

Controlling the Sends Signals

Pre-fader/ Post-fader Effect Sends

You can con ﬁgu re each Effect Sen d on in pu t ch an n els 1 th rou gh 20

as “pre-fader” or “post-fader” by adju stin g param eters on th e CURRENT

SCENE STATUS fu n ction page.

Pre-fader sign als do n ot pass th rou gh th e ch an n el faders an d are

th erefore u n affected by ch an n el fader settin gs. Post-fader sign als

pass th rou gh th e ch an n el faders an d are affected by ch an n el fader

settin gs.

Th e ch an n el faders en able you to adju st th e ch an n el level an d th e

Effect Sen d level of post-fader sign als sim u ltan eou sly.

Follow th e steps below to select “pre-fader” or “post-fader” for an

effect processor.

^1.Press t h e [CURRENT SCENE STATUS] k ey.

Th e VM200 displays th e CURRENT SCENE STATUS fu n ction page:

^2.Rot at e t h e Freq an d Q rot ary con t rols for ch an n els 5 –6 t o

select PRE or POST for t h e EFF1 an d EFF2 param et ers.

Th e defau lt settin g is “POST.”

Wh en you ch an ge th e settin g, th e selected valu e ﬂash es.

^3.Press t h e [ENTER] k ey t o con ﬁ rm t h e select ion .

^4.Press t h e [EXIT] k ey t o display t h e CHANNEL EDIT fu n ct ion page.

View ing and Adjusting the Effect Send Level

Th e VM200 en ables you to view an d adju st effect sen d levels for

effects processors EFF1 an d EFF2 on th e Ch an n el View (CH VIEW)

fu n ction page. A graph ic im age of a fader an d a n u m erical valu e rep-

resen t th e sen d levels on th e display.

To view an d adju st th e effect sen d levels, follow th ese steps:

^1.Press t h e [CH VIEW] k ey.

Th e [CH VIEW] key an d all [EQ EDIT] keys ﬂash .

130

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing and Adjusting the Effect Send Master Level

Th e VM200 displays th e 1:CH VIEW fu n ction page, wh ich in clu des

graph ic an d n u m eric in dicators of th e effect sen d levels for EFF1

an d EFF2.

channel number

effect send fader level

^2.If you wish t o adju st t h e effect sen d level, specify a ch an n el

wh ose fader you wish t o u se by pressin g a Page Select k ey an d

t h e [EQ EDIT] k ey for t h e ch an n el.

Th e VM200 displays a n ew ch an n el n u m ber in th e CH section ,

n ear th e u pper -left corn er of th e display.

^3.Press t h e EFF1 or EFF2 k ey in t h e Fader Mode sect ion t o

specify an effect s processor.

Th e selected key ﬂash es.

^4.Raise t h e fader for t h e correspon din g ch an n el.

Th e graph ic fader an d n u m erical read-ou t on th e display reﬂect

th e adju stm en t in real-tim e.

View ing and Adjusting the Effect Send Master Level

You can con trol Effect Sen d m aster levels u sin g th e Master fader in

th e appropriate Fader Mode.

^1.Press t h e [EFF1 ] or [EFF2 ] k ey in t h e Fader Mode sect ion t o

specify t h e effect s processor you wish t o adju st .

Th e selected key ﬂash es.

^2.Raise or lower t h e Mast er fader t o adju st t h e Effect Sen d m as-

t er level.

Th e Effect Sen ds m aster level is displayed on th e ou tpu t ch an n el

page of th e CHANNEL EDIT fu n ction page (also called th e “CHANNEL

EDIT/ OUTPUT” fu n ction page).

effect send master level

VM200 User’s Guide

131

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Effects

Muting Effect Sends

You can m u te Effect Sen d m asters u sin g th e Master [ON] key. Th e

fu n ction of th is key depen ds on th e selected Fader m ode. See “[ON]

Keys” on page 34 for m ore in form ation .

^1.Press t h e [EFF1 ] or [EFF2 ] k ey in t h e Fader Mode sect ion t o

select Effect Sen d 1 or 2 .

^2.Press t h e Mast er [ON] k ey t o t u rn t h e Effect Sen d on or off.

Monitoring Effects Sends

You can m on itor th e EFF sen d sign al by con n ectin g th e MONITOR

OUT jacks to an am pliﬁer an d speakers. Set th e Mon Sel (Mon itor

Select) param eter on th e SETUP:SYSTEM 1: CLOCK/ MON fu n ction page to

EFF1 or EFF2.

You can also m on itor th e EFF sen d sign al th rou gh a pair of stereo

h eadph on es con n ected to th e PHONES jack. For m ore in form ation ,

see “Mon itorin g Sign als” on page 97.

Controlling the Return Signals

Th is section explain s h ow to set levels an d pan effect retu rn .

Setting the Effect Return Level

You can u se the channels 17–20 faders to adju st the Effect retu rn level.

^1.Press t h e [CHANNEL] k ey in t h e Fader Mode sect ion .

^2.Press t h e [1 7 –2 0 EFF RTN] Page Select k ey.

^3.Raise t h e ch an n el fader t o adju st t h e level.

You can view th e effect retu rn level on th e CHANNEL EDIT/ INPUT fu n c-

tion page.

effect return level

Panning Effects Returns

Th e Ch an n els 17–20 pan pots pan sign als between th e left an d righ t

ch an n els of th e Stereo Bu ss Ou t an d Rec Bu ss Ou t, an d th e odd an d

even AUX bu ss ou ts. See “Pan n in g In pu t Ch an n els” on page 65 for

m ore in form ation .

132

VM200 UserÕs Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Effects Library

Th e VM200 stores effects settin gs as program s in th e Effects Library,

wh ich con tain s 50 Preset program s (0–49) an d 50 User program s

(50–99).

Th e Preset effects program s are design ed for speciﬁc application s an d

in stru m en ts, an d in clu de n u m erou s reverbs, delays, ch oru ses,

ﬂan gers, an d com bin ation s. See “Effect Preset L i b rary L i s t” on

page 125 f or a table of Preset effects program s.

You can cu stom ize th e Preset program s, assign each on e a n am e, an d

store th em as User program s.

You can load effects from th e Effects Library to eith er effects proces-

sor (EFF1 or EFF2).

Editing Effects

You can edit effects program s an d th en store th em as u ser program s

in program n u m bers 50–99.

^1.Recall t h e effect you wish t o edit t o t h e EFF1 or EFF2 proces-

sor.

See “Recallin g Effects Program s” on page 134 f or m ore in fo r m a-

tion on recallin g effects.

2. Press t h e correspon din g [EFF1 ] or [EFF2 ] k ey in t h e Eff Edit

sect ion .

(If you recalled th e effect to EFF1 in step 1, press th e [EFF1] key in

th is step, etc.)

Th e VM200 displays th e EFF EDIT fu n ction page for th e selected

effect, an d th e selected key ligh ts u p.

3. Use t h e Gain , Freq, an d Q rot ary con t rols t o adju st t h e valu e

of each param et er.

If you wish to store th e ch an ge, refer to “Storin g Effects Program s”

on page 135.

4. Press t h e [EXIT] k ey t o ret u rn t o Ch an n el Edit m ode.

All param eters are described in detail in “Effects Param eters” on

page 139.

VM200 User’s Guide

133

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Effects

Recalling Effects Program s

You can recall Effects program s 0 th rou gh 99.

1. Press t h e [EFF1 ] or [EFF2 ] k ey in t h e Eff Edit sect ion t o specify

t h e effect s processor t o wh ich you wan t t o recall t h e effect .

Th e VM200 displays th e fu n ction page for th e effect cu rren tly

loaded to th e effects processor. Th e [EFF1] or [EFF2] key you

selected ligh ts u p.

2. Press t h e [RECALL] k ey in t h e Eff Library sect ion .

Th e VM200 displays th e EFF LIBRARY RECALL fu n ction page, an d th e

[EFF1] or [EFF2] key ﬂash es.

scroll list

3. Use t h e Dat a Wh eel or t h e [</ -1 ] an d [+1 / >] k eys t o select t h e

desired effect program n u m ber from t h e program list in g on

t h e fu n ct ion page.

4. Press t h e [ENTER] k ey.

Th e VM200 recalls th e effect program to th e speciﬁed effects pro-

cessor an d displays th e selected effect’s param eter fu n ction page.

5. You can press t h e [EXIT] k ey t o ret u rn t o Ch an n el Edit m ode

at an y t im e.

Not e: If an effect program in th e library con tain s n o data, th e term

“NO_DATA” will appear on th e display. You can n ot recall su ch program s

u n til you store effect data in th e program .

134

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Storing Effects Programs

Storing Effects Program s

You can store effect settin gs in User program s 50 th rou gh 99.

1. Press t h e [EFF1 ] or [EFF2 ] k ey in t h e Eff Edit sect ion t o specify

t h e effect s processor t o wh ich you wan t t o st ore t h e effect .

Th e VM200 displays th e fu n ction page for th e effect cu rren tly

loaded to th e effects processor, an d th e [EFF1] or [EFF2] key you

selected ligh ts u p.

You can m odify an y Preset program or previou sly-stored User pro-

gram . Make an y adju stm en ts you like, th en con tin u e with th is

procedu re to store th e “n ew” effect.

2. Press t h e [STORE] k ey in t h e Eff Library sect ion .

Th e VM200 displays th e EFF LIBRARY STORE fu n ction page, an d th e

[EFF1] or [EFF2] key ﬂash es.

3. Rot at e t h e Dat a Wh eel or t h e [</ -1 ] an d [+1 / >] k eys t o select an

Effect program locat ion .

Th e effect program n u m bers an d n am es scroll in th e u pper -righ t

of th e display. You can select program n u m bers 50 to 99, in clu -

sive. Effect program s th at con tain n o data are labeled “(No Data)”.

4. Press t h e [ENTER] k ey.

Th e VM200 displays th e EFF LIBRARY NAME EDIT fu n ction page, wh ich

en ables you to n am e or re-n am e effect program s. Th e program

title appears in th e u pper -righ t of th e display.

character set box

title box

character-selector

cursor

Th e EFF LIBRARY NAME EDIT fu n ction page in clu des a ch aracter set

box th at displays all th e letters of th e alph abet, as well as n u m er -

als an d pu n ctu ation sym bols. You can u se th ese ch aracters to

n am e or title you r effect program .

You can u se an y trian gle of Gain , Freq, an d Q rotary con trols to

select th e ch aracters for th e title.

VM200 User’s Guide

135

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Effects

Th e Gain con trol m oves th e cu rsor position left an d righ t in th e

title box. Th e Freq con trol m oves th e ch aracter -selector u p an d

down th e m atrix; th e Q con trol m oves th e ch aracter -selector left

an d righ t.

You can also press th e [</ -1] an d [+1/ >] keys to m ove th e cu rsor

an d rotate th e Data Wh eel to select ch aracters or n u m bers.

5. Rot at e t h e Freq an d Q rot ary con t rols t o select a ch aract er,

t h en t u rn t h e Gain rot ary con t rol on e n ot ch righ t t o m ove

t h e cu rsor t o t h e n ext space in t h e n am e, an d repeat t h e pro-

cess.

Th e very u sefu l “Space to En d” option in th e lower -righ t corn er of

th e ch aracter set box will ﬁll-in th e rem ain der of you r title with

blan k spaces.

6. Wh en you ’ve ﬁ n ish ed n am in g t h e program , press t h e [ENTER]

k ey t o st ore t h e Effect program .

Th e followin g warn in g dialog appears for a brief m om en t.

Warn in g: Do n ot power off th e VM200 wh ile it is writin g to th e ﬂash

m em ory or you m ay dam age th e VM200.

After th e warn in g, th e VM200 displays th e EFF EDIT fu n ction page.

7. Press t h e [EXIT] k ey an y t im e t o exit t h e EFF LIBRARY STORE or

EFF LIBRARY NAME EDIT fu n ct ion pages.

Th e VM200 displays th e CHANNEL EDIT fu n ction page.

136

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Editing Effect Program Titles

You can edit Effect program titles, ju st in case you wan t to ch an ge

th eir n am e for som e reason . To do so, you recall th e target Effect pro-

gram to a ch an n el, th en re-store it with a differen t title.

1. Press t h e [EFF1 ] or [EFF2 ] k ey in t h e Eff Edit sect ion t o specify

t h e effect s processor t o wh ich you wan t t o recall t h e effect .

Th e VM200 displays th e fu n ction page for th e effect cu rren tly

loaded to th e effects processor, an d th e [EFF1] or [EFF2] key you

selected ligh ts u p.

2. Press t h e [RECALL] k ey in t h e Eff Library sect ion .

Th e VM200 displays th e EFF LIBRARY RECALL fu n ction page, an d th e

[EFF1] or [EFF2] key ﬂash es.

3. Rot at e t h e Dat a Wh eel or u se t h e [</ -1 ] an d [+1 / >] k eys t o

select an Effect program you wish t o ren am e.

You can n ot ch an ge th e title of Preset program s 00–49.

4. Press t h e [ENTER] k ey t o recall t h e desired Effect program .

Th e VM200 recalls th e effect program to th e speciﬁed effects pro-

cessor an d displays th e selected effect’s param eter fu n ction page.

5. Press t h e [STORE] k ey in t h e Eff Library sect ion .

Th e VM200 displays th e EFF LIBRARY STORE fu n ction page, an d th e

[EFF1] or [EFF2] key ﬂash es.

VM200 User’s Guide

137

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Effects

6. Press t h e [ENTER] k ey.

Th e VM200 displays th e EFF LIBRARY NAME EDIT fu n ction page. Th e

title box sh ows th e program n u m ber an d th e cu rren t n am e.

character set box

title box

character-selector

cursor

Use an y Gain , Freq, an d Q rotary con trols to re-assign a n am e to

th e Effect program .

You can also press th e [</ -1] an d [+1/ >] keys to m ove th e cu rsor

an d rotate th e Data Wh eel to select ch aracters or n u m bers.

Refer to step 4 of “Storin g Effects Program s” on page 135 f or

in form ation on assign in g a n am e.

7. Wh en you ’ve ﬁ n ish ed re-n am in g t h e program , press t h e

[ENTER] k ey t o st ore t h e n ew Effect program t it le.

Th e followin g warn in g dialog appears for a brief m om en t.

Warn in g: Do n ot power off th e VM200 wh ile it is writin g to th e ﬂash

m em ory or you m ay dam age th e VM200.

After th e warn in g, th e VM200 displays th e EFF EDIT fu n ction page.

8. Press t h e [EXIT] k ey an y t im e t o exit t h e EFF LIBRARY STORE or EQ

LIBRARY NAME EDIT fu n ct ion pages.

Th e VM200 displays th e CHANNEL EDIT fu n ction page.

138

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Effects Parameters

Effects Param eters

Th e followin g tables list th e param eters of each effect type. Th e n u m -

bers in paren th eses in dicate th e preset effects th at belon g to th e

effect types.

Reverb-type Effects (00–24)

Parameter

REV TIME

Value

Description

0.1–30.0 [s] (0.1 step)

Length of the reverberation.

Delay time from the early reﬂections until the

reverb.

PRE DLY

DENSITY

0–160 [ms] (1 step)

Density of the reverb.

0–10, AUTO

Volume balance between the early reﬂections

and the reverb. Only ER with 0%, and only reverb

with 100%.

E/R BAL

0–100 [%] (1 step)

ROOM SIZE

E/R FB

0.1–2.0 (0.1 step)

0–100 [%] (1 step)

0–10 (1 step)

The size of the room (relative to E/R).

Degree of repeated early reﬂections

Left/right spread of the reverb effects.

DIFFUSION

Length of the low frequency reverberation,

expressed as a ratio relative to the REV.TIME.

LO RATIO

HI RATIO

0.1–2.0 (0.1 step)

Length of the high frequency reverberation,

expressed as a ratio relative to REV.TIME.

1.00kHz–20.2kHz, THRU

(step: same as EQ)

LPF

Cut-off frequency of the low pass ﬁlter.

Brightness in the high range of the reverb.

PRESENCE

-10–0–+10 (1 step)

1. With AUTO, the optimum value for the REV TIME setting will be used.

2. Brightness increases with a positive setting, and decreases with a negative setting.

Early Reﬂection-type Effects (25–32)

Parameter

Value

Description

ROOM SIZE

0.1–2.0 (0.1 step)

The size of the room (relative to E/R).

0–200 [ms] (1 step)

TBD

Delay time from the dry sound until the early

reﬂections of the reverb are heard.

INI.DLY

LIVENESS

E/R FB

Adjusts how the reﬂections decay.

Degree of repeated early reﬂections

Low frequency amount of the feedback.

Left/right spread of the reﬂections.

0–10 (1 step)

0–100 [%] (1 step)

0.1–1.0 (0.1 step)

0–10 (1 step)

LO RATIO

HI RATIO

DIFFUSION

VM200 User’s Guide

139

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Effects

Parameter

DENSITY

Value

0–10 (1 step)

-10–0–+10 (1 step)

Description

Density of the reverb.

PRESENCE

Brightness in the high range of the reverb.

Cut-off frequency of the low pass ﬁlter.

1.00kHz–20.2kHz, THRU

(step: same as EQ)

LPF

1. 0: dead, 10: live

2. Brightness increases with a positive setting, and decreases with a negative setting.

MONO_DELAY (33)

Parameter

Value

Description

DELAY TIME

0.1–1360.0 [ms] (0.1 step)

Delay time.

Tempo value used to calculate DELAY TIME and

TEMPO

NOTE

30–250 [bps] (1 step)

NOTE.

Note value used to calculate DELAY TIME.

DELAY FB

LO RATIO

HI RATIO

0–100 [%] (1 step)

0.1–1.0 (0.1 step)

Amount of delay feedback.

Low frequency amount of the feedback.

High frequency amount of the feedback.

THRU, Same as EQ

value [Hz]

HPF

LPF

Cut-off frequency of the high pass ﬁlter.

Cut-off frequency of the low pass ﬁlter.

Same as EQ value [Hz],

THRU

1. If you adjust DELAY TIME, NOTE will be automatically changed.

2. If you adjust TEMPO, DELAY TIME will be automatically changed.

3. If you adjust NOTE, DELAY TIME will be automatically changed.

PAN_DELAY (34)

Parameter

Value

Description

DELAY TIME

TEMPO

0.1–1360.0 [ms] (0.1 step)

Delay time.

Tempo value used to calculate DELAY TIME and

30–250 [bps] (1 step)

NOTE.

NOTE

Note value used to calculate DELAY TIME.

DELAY FB

LO RATIO

HI RATIO

0–100 [%] (1 step)

0.1–1.0 (0.1 step)

Amount of delay feedback.

Low frequency amount of the feedback.

High frequency amount of the feedback.

140

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Effects Parameters

Parameter

HPF

Value

Description

Cut-off frequency of the high pass ﬁlter.

THRU, Same as EQ

value [Hz]

PAN1

PAN2

L10.0–0.0–R100 (0.5 step) Pan position of the ﬁrst delay.

L10.0–0.0–R100 (0.5 step) Pan position of the second delay.

Same as EQ value [Hz],

Cut-off frequency of the low pass ﬁlter.

THRU

LPF

1. If you adjust DELAY TIME, NOTE will be automatically changed.

2. If you adjust TEMPO, DELAY TIME will be automatically changed.

3. If you adjust NOTE, DELAY TIME will be automatically changed.

DUAL_DELAY (35)

Parameter

Value

Description

DLYTIME1/2

TEMPO

0.0–680.0 [ms] (0.1 step)

Delay time of DELAY 1 or 2.

Tempo value used to calculate DLY TIME1, DLY

30–250 [bps] (1 step)

TIME2, NOTE1, and NOTE2.

DLY1/2NOTE

Note value used to calculate DLY TIME1 or 2.

DLY FB1/2

DLY1/2HI-R.

DLY1/2PAN

0–100 [%] (1 step)

0.1–1.0 (0.1 step)

Amount of DELAY1 or 2 feedback.

High frequency amount of the DELAY 1 or 2 feed-

back.

L10.0–0.0–R10.0 (0.5 step) Pan position of the DELAY 1 or 2.

1. If you change DELAY TIME, NOTE will be automatically changed.

2. If you change TEMPO, DELAY TIME will be automatically changed. Two TEMPO

parameter rotary controls operate in sync.

3. If you change DELAY TIME or TEMPO, the closest note value will be selected.

3CH_DELAY (36)

Parameter

Value

0.1–1360.0 [ms] (0.1 step) Delay time. (0.1 step when ENTER is pressed.)

0–100 [%] (1 step) Delay 1/2/3 level.

Description

DLY TIME

1/2/3

DLY1/2/3

GAIN

DLY1/2/3

PAN

L10.0–0.0–R10.0 (0.5 step) Delay 1/2/3 pan position.

0.1–1360.0 [ms] (0.1 step) Delay time of feedback

FB DLY

TIME

DELAY FB

0–100 [%] (1 step)

Amount of delay feedback.

VM200 User’s Guide

141

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Effects

Parameter

HI RATIO

Value

Description

0.1–1.0 (0.1 step)

High frequency amount of the feedback.

CHORUS (37)

Parameter

Value

Description

Modulation depth

DEPTH

0–100 [%] (1 step)

-10–0–+10 (1 step)

PRESENCE

Brightness in the high range of the reverb.

1.00kHz–20.2kHz, THRU

(step: same as EQ)

LPF

Cut-off frequency of the low pass ﬁlter.

1. Brightness increases with a positive setting, and decreases with a negative setting.

3D_CHORUS (38)

Parameter

Value

Description

DEPTH

0–100 [%] (1 step)

-10–0–+10 (1 step)

Modulation depth.

PRESENCE

Brightness in the high range of the reverb.

Cut-off frequency of the low pass ﬁlter.

1.00kHz–20.2kHz, THRU

(step: same as EQ)

LPF

1. Brightness increases with a positive setting, and decreases with a negative setting.

FLANGE (39)

Parameter

Value

Description

RATE

0.01–2.00 [Hz] (0.01 step) Modulation speed.

DEPTH

0–100 [%] (1 step)

Modulation depth.

Delay time from the direct sound until the modu-

lated sound.

MOD DLY

0.0–30.0 [ms] (0.1 step)

FLANGE FB

FLA1/2GAIN

0–100 [%] (1 step)

Feedback amount.

Gain of FLANGE 1 or 2.

L10.00–0.0–R10.0 (0.5

step)

FLA1/2PAN

PRESENCE

Pan position of FLANGE 1 or 2.

Brightness in the high range of the reverberation.

-10–0–+10 (1 step)

142

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Effects Parameters

Parameter

LPF

Value

Description

Cut-off frequency of the low pass ﬁlter.

1.00kHz–20.2kHz, THRU

(step: same as EQ)

1. Brightness increases with a positive setting, and decreases with a negative setting.

MONO_PITCH (40)

Parameter

Value

Description

Amount of pitch shift.

-24–0–+24 (1 step)

(+/-2 octave)

PITCH

-100–0–+100 (1 step)

(+/- semitone)

ADJUST

Fine adjustment to the pitch shift.

PITCH DLY

PITCH FB

0–340 [ms] (1 step)

0–100 [%] (1 step)

Delay time of the pitch shift.

Feedback amount.

L10.0–0.0–R10.0 (0.5

step)

PITCH PAN

Pan position of the pitch shift.

PITCH MODE

Selects the size of the buffer for pitch shift.

1, 2, 3, 4

1. Select “1” when response speed is priority. Select “2” for a typical setting. Select “3” or

“4” for more clarity.

DUAL_PITCH (41)

Parameter

Value

Description

-24–0–+24 (1 step)

(+/-2 octave)

PITCH1/2

Amount of pitch shift for PITCH SHIFT 1 or 2.

-100–0–+100 (1 step)

(+/- semitone)

Fine adjustment to the pitch shift for PITCH

SHIFT 1 or 2.

ADJUST1/2

Delay time of the pitch shift for PITCH SHIFT 1 or

PIT1/2 DLY

PIT1/2 FB

PIT1/2 PAN

0–340 [ms] (1 step)

0–100 [%] (1 step)

Feedback amount for PITCH SHIFT 1 or 2.

L10.0–0.0–R10.0 (0.5

step)

Pan position of PITCH SHIFT 1 or 2.

Selects the size of the buffer for PITCH SHIFT 1

or 2.

PIT1/2 MODE

1, 2, 3, 4

1. Select “1” when response speed is priority. Select “2” for a typical setting. Select “3” or

“4” for more clarity.

VM200 User’s Guide

143

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Effects

Delay->Reverb-type Effects (42–45)

Parameter

DELAY TIME

DELAY FB

DELAY BAL

REV TIME

Value

Description

1–500 [ms] (1 step)

0–100 [%] (1 step)

0.1–30.0 [s] (0.1 step)

Delay time.

Amount of delay feedback.

Delay sound level.

Length of the reverberation.

Delay time from the early reﬂections until the

reverb.

PRE DLY

0–160 [ms] (1 step)

DENSITY

Density of the reverb.

0–10, AUTO

DIFFUSION

0–100 [%] (1 step)

Left/right spread of the reverb effects.

Length of the low frequency reverberation,

expressed as a ratio relative to the REV.TIME.

LO RATIO

HI RATIO

0.1–2.0 (0.1 step)

Length of the high frequency reverberation,

expressed as a ratio relative to REV.TIME.

0.1–1.0 (0.1 step)

1.00kHz–20.2kHz, THRU

(step: same as EQ)

LPF

Cut-off frequency of the low pass ﬁlter.

Brightness in the high range of the reverb.

PRESENCE

-10–0–+10 (1 step)

1. With AUTO, the optimum value for the REV TIME setting will be used.

2. Brightness increases with a positive setting, and decreases with a negative setting.

CHORUS-REVERB (46)

Parameter

Value

Description

CHO DEPTH

REV TIME

0–100 [%] (1 step)

0.1–30.0 [s] (0.1 step)

Modulation depth.

Length of the reverberation.

Delay time from the early reﬂections until the

reverb.

PRE DLY

HI RATIO

0–160 [ms] (1 step)

0.1–1.0 (0.1 step)

Length of the high frequency reverberation,

expressed as a ratio relative to REV.TIME.

PRESENCE

DENSITY

Brightness in the high range of the reverb.

Density of the reverb.

-10–0–+10 (1 step)

0–10, AUTO

1.00kHz–20.2kHz, THRU

(step: same as EQ)

LPF

Cut-off frequency of the low pass ﬁlter.

Level of reverb sound.

REV BAL

0–100 [%] (1 step)

1. Brightness increases with a positive setting, and decreases with a negative setting.

2. With AUTO, the optimum value for the REV TIME setting will be used.

144

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Effects Parameters

REVERB-CHORUS (47)

Parameter

Value

Description

Length of the reverberation.

REV TIME

PRE DLY

0.1–30.0 [s] (0.1 step)

Delay time from the early reﬂections until the

reverb.

0–160 [ms] (1 step)

0.1–1.0 (0.1 step)

Length of the high frequency reverberation,

expressed as a ratio relative to REV.TIME.

HI RATIO

PRESENCE

DENSITY

Brightness in the high range of the reverb.

Density of the reverb.

-10–0–+10 (1 step)

0–10, AUTO

1.00kHz–20.2kHz, THRU

(step: same as EQ)

LPF

Cut-off frequency of the low pass ﬁlter.

CHO DEPTH

CHO BAL

0–100 [%] (1 step)

Modulation depth.

Level of chorus sound.

1. Brightness increases with a positive setting, and decreases with a negative setting.

2. With AUTO, the optimum value for the REV TIME setting will be used.

FLANGE-REVERB (48)

Parameter

Value

Description

Modulation speed. (0.01 step when ENTER is

pressed.)

FLA RATE

0.01–2.00 [Hz] (00.1 step)

DEPTH

0–100 [%] (1 step)

0.1–30.0 [s] (0.1 step)

Modulation depth.

FLA FB

REV TIME

Feedback amount.

Length of the reverberation.

Delay time from the early reﬂections until the

reverb.

PRE DLY

HI RATIO

0–160 [ms] (1 step)

0.1–1.0 (0.1 step)

Length of the high frequency reverberation,

expressed as a ratio relative to REV.TIME.

PRESENCE

DENSITY

Brightness in the high range of the reverb.

Density of the reverb.

-10–0–+10 (1 step)

0–10, AUTO

1.00kHz–20.2kHz, THRU

(step: same as EQ)

LPF

Cut-off frequency of the low pass ﬁlter.

Level of reverb sound.

REV BAL

0–100 [%] (1 step)

1. Brightness increases with a positive setting, and decreases with a negative setting.

2. With AUTO, the optimum value for the REV TIME setting will be used.

VM200 User’s Guide

145

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Effects

REVERB-FLANGE (49)

Parameter

Value

Description

Length of the reverberation.

REV TIME

PRE DLY

0.1–30.0 [s] (0.1 step)

Delay time from the early reﬂections until the

reverb.

0–160 [ms] (1 step)

0.1–1.0 (0.1 step)

Length of the high frequency reverberation,

expressed as a ratio relative to REV.TIME.

HI RATIO

PRESENCE

DENSITY

Brightness in the high range of the reverb.

Density of the reverb.

-10–0–+10 (1 step)

0–10, AUTO

1.00kHz–20.2kHz, THRU

(step: same as EQ)

LPF

Cut-off frequency of the low pass ﬁlter.

Modulation speed. (0.01 step when ENTER is

pressed.)

FLA RATE

0.01–2.00 [Hz] (0.01 step)

FLA FB

0–100 [%] (1 step)

Feedback amount.

FLA BAL

Level of ﬂange sound.

1. Brightness increases with a positive setting, and decreases with a negative setting.

2. With AUTO, the optimum value for the REV TIME setting will be used.

146

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAX

MIN

CHAPTER 9

Scene Memory

EFF2

RECORDING MIXER

ORE

VM200

EFF EDIT

DIGIT

EFF1

EFF LIBRAR

RECALL

ORE

EQ ON

SELECTED EQ

EQ LIBRAR

-18

-24

REC BUSSSOLO

-36

-40

RECALL

ST BUSS/SOLO

About This Chapter

Th is ch apter describes Scen e Mem ory an d explain s h ow to store

SOLO

EXIT

EQ/HI

GAIN

an d recall scen es an d h ow to preven t speciﬁc param eters from

bein g u pdated by a scen e recalled from m em ory.

EQ EDIT

17-20 EFF RTN

FREQ

SOLO

EQ EDIT

Chapter Contents

SOLO

GAIN

EQ/HI-MID

-10

Wh a t i s Scen e Mem ory? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

-20

EQ EDIT

ADA

AGE SELECT

Scen e Edit In dicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

-30

9-16

-40

FREQ

SOLO

Wh a t Can Y o u Store in a Scen e?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

-60

Preset Scen e Mem ory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

-10

EQ EDIT

Recallin g Mix Scen es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

-20

SOLO

Recallin g a Scen e A u t om atically at Start-u p . . . . . . . . . 151

-30

Recallin g a Scen e Man u ally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

GAIN

EQ/LO-MID

-40

-10

EQ EDIT

Recalli n g M ix Sce n es Using MIDI Program Change Messages. 152

-20

FREQ

SOLO

Motorized Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

-30

-40

Storin g Mix Scen es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

-10

EQ EDIT

Ed i tin g Scen e Mem ory Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

-20

Rec

SOLO

all Safe Fu n ction . . . . . . . . .

Refer to th e “R ecallin g Mix Scen es” on page 151 an d “S torin g Mix

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

-30

-40

Speci f yin g Rec a l l Sa f e Ch a n n els . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

-10

EQ EDIT

Speci f yin g Rec a l l Sa f e P a ram eters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

-20

SOLO

+10

-30

-40

-10

EQ EDIT

-20

SOLO

+10

-30

-40

-10

-20

+10

-30

-40

AIR/

-10

GROUP

-20

METER

+10

CHANNEL/

-30

-40

MMC SEND

VM200 User’s Guide

147

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scene Memory

What is Scene Mem ory?

“Scen e Mem ory” refers to speciﬁc location s in th e ﬂash m em ory of

th e VM200 in wh ich you can store m ix scen es. A m ix scen e is a

sn apsh ot of settin gs for virtu ally all VM200 param eters (i.e., EQ,

fader position s, effects, an d so on ) at a given poin t in tim e.

Say you h ave ﬁn ally arrived at th e perfect m ix settin g for recordin g a

particu lar in stru m en talist in you r stu dio. It sou n ds great, bu t n ext

week you wan t to be able to recall th e sam e settin gs. Sim ply store th e

scen e in to th e Scen e Mem ory, an d recall it n ext week. Th is is on e of

th e prin ciple advan tages of a digital recordin g m ixer.

Th e VM200 featu res 100 (0–99) scen e m em ories. You can assign a

n am e to each on e.

Th e VM200 also featu res th ree preset scen es: P0 [In it Mix], P1

[Recordin g], an d P2 [Mix Down ]. Th ese are u sefu l for com m on m ixin g

situ ation s.

You can set in dividu al ch an n els or param eters as “recall safe.” Th is

m ean s th at wh en you recall a n ew scen e from m em ory, th e settin gs

for th e speciﬁed ch an n els or param eters rem ain u n ch an ged.

You can store an d recall scen e m em ories in th ree ways:

❑ By pressin g th e [RECALL] key in th e Scen e Mem ory section an d

selectin g a scen e;

❑ By program m in g th e VM200 to au tom atically recall a scen e wh en

th e VM200 is powered on ;

❑ By sen din g rem ote MIDI Program Ch an ge m essages from a com -

pu ter or MIDI sequ en cer (see “Program Ch an ge To Scen e Mem ory

Assign m en t Tables” on page 210).

You can also back u p scen e m em ory data to an extern al MIDI device

u sin g MIDI Bu lk Du m p m essages. See “Bu lk Du m p” on page 189 for

m ore in form ation .

You store scen es u sin g th e SCENE MEMORY STORE fu n ction page, an d

recall th em u sin g th e SCENE MEMORY RECALL fu n ction page. On both

pages, you will u tilize th e Scen e Mem ory [STORE] an d [RECALL] keys.

scene number

scrollable list of scene names and numbers

scene name

EQ Enable indicator

Th e SCENE MEMORY STORE fu n ction page in clu des th e followin g in form a-

tion :

❑ cu rren t scen e n am e an d n u m ber (in th e above exam ple, “P0”

m ean s “Preset 0”)

❑ EQ-en abled ch an n el layers in th e cu rren t scen e

❑ a scrollable list of scen e n am es an d n u m bers

148

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scene Edit Indicator

The bottom half of the function page is identical to the CHANNEL EDIT fu nc-

tion page, displaying PAN controls for each channel in the current layer.

scene number

scrollable list of scene names and numbers

scene name

EQ Enable indicator

EQ Enabled channel layer in selected scene

Th e SCENE MEMORY RECALL fu n ction page in clu des th e followin g in form a-

tion :

❑ cu rren t scen e n am e an d n u m ber (in th e above exam ple “P0” m ean s

“Preset 0”)

❑ EQ-en abled ch an n el layers in th e cu rren t scen e (left side of page)

❑ a scrollable list of scen e m em ory location n am es an d n u m bers

❑ EQ-en abled ch an n el layers in th e scen e selected in th e list (righ t

side of page)

❑ th e bottom h alf of th e fu n ction page is iden tical to th e Ch an n el Edit

fu n ction page. It displays PAN con trols for each ch an n el in th e cu r -

ren t layer. Adju stm en ts you m ake to th e PAN con trols will be saved

with th e scen e.

Scene Edit Indicator

Th e VM200 featu res an EDIT in dicator th at ligh ts u p wh en you

adju st an y param eter in th e scen e, in dicatin g th at th e cu rren t scen e

n o lon ger exactly m atch es th e param eters of th e scen e you recalled.

Init Mix

EDIT indicator

EDIT

What Can You Store in a Scene?

You can store th e followin g VM200 m ix settin gs in a scen e:

Section

Items

Ch fader, Ch on, Ch pan, AUX1–4 sends, Eff1/2 sends, AUX1&2 pan,

AUX 3&4 pan, EQ/LO Gain/Freq/Q, EQ/LO-MID Gain/Freq/Q,

EQ/HI-MID Gain/Freq/Q, EQ/LO Gain/Freq/Q, EQ on, Routing, Phase,

Ch pair, Mute/Fader group, S/P DIF IN

Channel

(ch1–ch20)

Master

ST Buss master/on, AUX1–4 master/on, Eff1/2 master/on

EQ Enable, ADD AUX, AUX1–4 post/pre, Eff1/2 post/pre, AUX1&2 pair,

AUX3&4 pair

Scene Status

Others

Scene name, Effects 1/2 selection

VM200 User’s Guide

149

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scene Memory

Preset Scene Mem ory

Th e VM200 in clu des th ree preset scen es: P0, P1, an d P2.

Th ese presets were design ed as scen es you can qu ickly recall for

th ree com m on pu rposes:

❑ In it Mix: For in itial m ixin g

❑ Recordin g: For a typical recordin g situ ation

❑ Mix Down : For m ixin g down

You can recall a preset scen e, edit its param eters, an d store it again

u n der a n ew n am e. However, you can n ot overwrite th e pre-pro-

gram m ed settin gs of a preset scen e.

Th ese preset program s are all qu ite sim ilar; th ey differ on ly in th e fol-

lowin g settin gs an d u sage:

ADD.

Name

Routing

Usage

Enable AUX

Normal mixing application, such as

PA, live, etc.

Init_Mix

1–8

1–20:ST Buss

1–8:Rec Buss Overdubbing or bounce recording via

9–20:ST Buss Rec Buss.

Recording 1–8

Mix_Down 9–16

OFF

1–20:ST Buss ADAT mixdown

150

VM200 UserÕs Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Recalling Mix Scenes

You can recall scen es from Scen e Mem ory in th ree ways:

❑ m an u ally

❑ au tom atically, wh en th e power is tu rn ed on to th e VM200

❑ rem otely u sin g MIDI Program Ch an ge m essages.

You can recall preset scen es P0, P1, or P2, or an y scen e th at h as been

saved to Scen e Mem ory location 00 to 99.

Recalling a Scene Manually

^1.Press t h e Scen e Mem ory [RECALL] k ey.

Th e VM200 displays th e SCENE MEMORY RECALL fu n ction page.

^2.Use t h e Dat a Wh eel or t h e [</ -1 ] an d [+1 / >] k eys t o select a

scen e.

Th e “EQ En abled” readou t on th e righ t side of th e display in di-

cates th e ch an n el layers for wh ich EQ is en abled. Th e readou t

ch an ges to reﬂect th e statu s of th e scen e h igh ligh ted by th e cu rsor

in th e scrollin g list. Also, if th e ADD.AUX param eter is tu rn ed on

for th e selected scen e program , “ADD.AUX” appears in th is area of

th e display. See “En ablin g AUX Sen ds 3 & 4 (ADD. AUX Param e-

ter)” on page 115 for m ore in form ation .

^3.Press t h e [ENTER] k ey t o con ﬁ rm t h e select ion .

Th e VM200 loads th e scen e an d retu rn s to th e previou s m ode.

Not e: You can n ot recall scen es titled “NO_DATA, becau se th ere is n o

data in th e scen e.

Not e: You can press th e [EXIT] key to retu rn to Ch an n el Edit m ode at

an y tim e, can cellin g th e scen e m em ory recall process.

Cau t ion : Wh en you recall a scen e, volu m e levels m ay su dden ly ch an ge

becau se of ch an ges in param eter valu es an d fader settin gs. Before you

recall th e scen e, lower th e Master Fader or tu rn down th e Mon itor an d

Ph on es Gain con trols as n ecessary to protect you r ears an d speakers.

Also, if th e Motor param eter is tu rn ed on , th e faders m ay su dden ly m ove

au tom atically. Watch you r ﬁn gers!

Recalling a Scene Autom atically at Start-up

You can specify a scen e to be recalled au tom atically wh en you power

on th e VM200. Th is is u sefu l if you wish to start all session s with a

particu lar scen e, or if you wish to con tin u e workin g with th e cu rren t

scen e in you r n ext session .

VM200 User’s Guide

151

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scene Memory

You can select on e of th e followin g option s: LAST-STORED, P0, P1,

P2, 0–99. Th e defau lt settin g is “LAST-STORED,” wh ich cau ses th e

m ost-recen tly stored scen e to be recalled.

^1.Press t h e [SYSTEM] k ey ﬁ ve t im es.

Th e VM200 displays th e 5:PWR ON RCL fu n ction page.

^2.Use t h e Dat a Wh eel or t h e [</ -1 ] an d [+1 / >] k eys t o select a

scen e.

You can select on e of th e followin g:

❑ an y Preset scen e (P0, P1, P2)

❑ an y User scen e (0-99)

❑ LAST-STORED (th e last scen e you stored)

Th e selected item ﬂash es in th e Scen e Nu m ber ﬁeld in th e lower

left corn er.

Not e: Press th e [EXIT] key at an y tim e to can cel th is process.

^3.Press t h e [ENTER] k ey t o con ﬁ rm t h e select ion .

Th e n ext tim e you power on th e VM200, th e selected scen e will be

au tom atically recalled.

Recalling Mix Scenes Using MIDI Program Change Messages

You can u se MIDI Program Ch an ge m essages to recall scen es for

sn apsh ot-style m ix au tom ation .

You can tran sm it Program Ch an ge m essages from a com pu ter, MIDI

sequ en cer, or MIDI keyboard. Most MIDI keyboards tran sm it a Pro-

gram Ch an ge m essage wh en a voice is selected. You can u se th is

m essage to recall a scen e on th e VM200. Usin g th is tech n iqu e, th e

syn th esizer an d VM200 can be recon ﬁgu red in stan tan eou sly.

To recall scen e m em ories u sin g MIDI Program Ch an ge m essages, do

th e followin g:

^1.Con n ect t h e VM2 0 0 t o MIDI equ ipm en t capable of t ran sm it -

t in g Program Ch an ge m essages.

See “Con n ectin g MIDI devices” on page 175 for m ore in form ation .

^2.Con ﬁ gu re t h e VM2 0 0 t o receive MIDI Program Ch an ge m es-

sages.

See “Program Ch an ge Messages” on page 177 for m ore in form a-

tion .

^3.Assign Program Ch an ge m essages t o scen e m em ories.

See “Program Ch an ge To Scen e Mem ory Assign m en t Tables” on

page 210 for m ore in form ation .

152

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Motorized Faders

If you h ave set th e Program Ch an ge/ Tx param eter to On , th e VM200

tran sm its a Program Ch an ge m essage each tim e you recall a scen e.

(Th e Program Ch an ge/ Tx param eter appears on th e Setu p: MIDI

1:MIDI TX&RX fu n ction page. See “Program Ch an ge Messages” on

page 177 for m ore in form ation .) Usin g th is capability, you can recall

program s on oth er MIDI equ ipm en t, su ch as a ton e program on a syn -

th esizer. You can record tran sm ission of Program Ch an ge m essages

from th e VM200 to a MIDI sequ en cer to later au tom ate m ix scen e

ch an ges. Refer to th e “Usin g Program Ch an ge Messages to Recall

Scen es” on page 180 for m ore in form ation .

Motorized Faders

In order for th e faders to m ove to th eir n ew position s au tom atically

wh en you ch an ge scen es, th e Motor param eter m u st be tu rn ed on .

Th e Motor param eter appears on th e SETUP: SYSTEM 1:CLOCK/ MON fu n c-

tion page.

Follow th e steps below to tu rn th e m otorized faders on or off.

^1.Press t h e [SYSTEM] k ey on ce t o display t h e 1: CLOCK/ MON fu n c-

t ion page.

turning motorized faders on and off

^2.Rot at e t h e EQ/ LO Q rot ary con t rol t o t u rn t h e Mot or param e-

t er on or off.

Th e defau lt settin g is “OFF.”

Warn in g: Do n ot force th e au tom ated faders or you m ay dam age th e

VM200.

Not e: If th e Motor param eter is tu rn ed on , th e fader will m ove su dden ly

an d au tom atically wh en a n ew scen e is recalled or th e Fader Mode is

ch an ged.

VM200 User’s Guide

153

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scene Memory

Storing Mix Scenes

You can store m ix scen es in Scen e m em ory location s 0–99.

^1.Press t h e Scen e Mem ory [STORE] k ey.

Th e VM200 displays th e SCENE MEMORY STORE fu n ction page.

^2.Use t h e Dat a Wh eel or t h e [</ -1 ] an d [+1 / >] k eys t o select a

scen e m em ory locat ion t o wh ich you wish t o st ore t h e cu r-

ren t scen e.

^3.Press t h e [ENTER] k ey.

Th e VM200 displays th e SCENE MEMORY NAME EDIT fu n ction page.

character-selector

cursor

title box

character set box

Th e SCENE MEMORY NAME EDIT fu n ction page in clu des a ch aracter set

box th at displays all th e letters of th e alph abet, as well as n u m er -

als an d pu n ctu ation sym bols. You can u se th ese ch aracters to

n am e or title th e scen e m em ory.

You can u se an y Gain , Freq, an d Q rotary con trols to select th e

ch aracters for th e title.

Th e Gain rotary con trol m oves th e cu rsor position left an d righ t in

th e title box. Th e Freq rotary con trol m oves th e ch aracter -selector

u p an d down th e m atrix; th e Q rotary con trol m oves th e ch arac-

ter -selector left an d righ t.

You can also press th e [</ -1] an d [+1/ >] keys to m ove th e cu rsor

an d rotate th e Data Wh eel to select ch aracters or n u m bers.

4. Use t h e Freq an d Q rot ary con t rols t o select a ch aract er, t h en

t u rn t h e Gain con t rol on e n ot ch righ t t o m ove t h e cu rsor t o

t h e n ext space in t h e n am e, an d repeat t h e process.

Th e “Space to En d” option will com plete you r title with blan k

spaces.

Not e: Press th e [EXIT] key at an y tim e to can cel th is process an d retu rn

to Ch an n el Edit m ode.

154

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Storing Mix Scenes

^5.Wh en you ’ve ﬁ n ish ed n am in g t h e scen e, press t h e [ENTER]

k ey.

Th e followin g warn in g m essage appears on th e display.

Th e VM200 stores th e scen e in to th e selected Scen e Mem ory loca-

tion an d retu rn s to th e previou s m ode.

Warn in g: Do n ot power off th e VM200 wh ile it is writin g to th e ﬂash

m em ory or you m ay dam age th e system .

VM200 User’s Guide

155

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scene Memory

Editing Scene Mem ory Titles

You can edit scen e n am es by recallin g a scen e an d re-n am in g it.

Scen es” on page 154 f or m ore in fo r m at i on .

Recall Safe Function

Wh en you recall a scen e, all param eters are u pdated with settin gs

from th e n ew scen e. However, in som e cases you m ay wish to retain

th e settin gs for speciﬁc ch an n els or param eters.

Th e VM200 featu res a Recall Safe fu n ction th at en ables you to desig-

n ate ch an n els an d certain param eters as “recall safe.” Wh en a n ew

scen e is recalled, “safe” ch an n els an d param eters are n ot u pdated.

Recall Safe settin gs are available for each in pu t ch an n el 1-20 an d for

th e followin g param eters:

❑ Ch an n el Fader

❑ Ch an n el Pan

❑ Ch an n el On

❑ Rou tin g

❑ AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, AUX4

❑ EFF1, EFF2

❑ EQ

❑ EQ On

You can specify safe ch an n els u sin g th e CH RCL SAFE fu n ction page. You

can specify safe param eters on th e RCL SAFE fu n ction page.

Specifying Recall Safe Channels

Th e VM200 featu res a Recall Safe fu n ction th at en ables you to desig-

n ate in pu t ch an n els 1-20 as “recall safe.” Wh en a n ew scen e is

recalled, “safe” ch an n els are n ot u pdated.

1. Press t h e [SYSTEM] k ey t h ree t im es.

Th e VM200 displays th e 3:CH RCL SAFE fu n ction page. All selectable

[EQ EDIT] keys ﬂash .

2. Select a ch an n el layer by pressin g Page Select k ey [1 –8 ANA-

156

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifying Recall Safe Parameters

3. Press t h e [EQ EDIT] k eys of t arget ch an n els t o design at e t h em

“safe” from bein g overwrit t en by recalled param et ers.

Th e [EQ EDIT] in dicators of th e recall safe ch an n els ligh t u p, an d

th e [EQ EDIT] in dicators of th e n on -safe ch an n els con tin u e to

ﬂash .

Th e box in dicators of th e recall safe ch an n els are h igh ligh ted.

4. Press t h e [CHANNEL/ METER] k ey t o ret u rn t o Ch an n el Edit

m ode.

Specifying Recall Safe Param eters

Th e VM200 featu res a Recall Safe fu n ction th at en ables you to desig-

n ate speciﬁc param eters as “recall safe.” Wh en a n ew scen e is

recalled, “safe” param eters are n ot u pdated.

1. Press t h e [SYSTEM] k ey t h ree t im es.

Th e VM200 displays th e 1:CH RCL SAFE fu n ction page.

2. Use t h e EQ Gain , Freq, an d Q rot ary con t rols for each param e-

t er t o t u rn Recall Safe on or off.

Th e defau lt settin g is all Off.

3. Press t h e [CHANNEL/ METER] k ey t o ret u rn t o Ch an n el Edit

m ode.

VM200 User’s Guide

157

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scene Memory

158

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAX

MIN

CHAPTER 10

Digital Connections

EFF2

RECORDING MIXER

ORE

VM200

EFF EDIT

DIGIT

EFF1

EFF LIBRAR

RECALL

ORE

EQ ON

SELECTED EQ

EQ LIBRAR

-18

-24

REC BUSSSOLO

-36

-40

RECALL

ST BUSS/SOLO

About This Chapter

Th is ch apter describes th e VM200’s digital in pu ts an d ou tpu ts,

SOLO

EXIT

EQ/HI

GAIN

in clu din g th e ADAT an d S/ P DIF digital con n ectors, word clock

m asters an d slaves, an d h ow to cascade m u ltiple VM200s.

EQ EDIT

17-20 EFF RTN

FREQ

SOLO

EQ EDIT

Chapter Contents

SOLO

GAIN

EQ/HI-MID

-10

Digital Con n ection s, Word Clocks, an d Sam ple Rates . . . . 160

-20

EQ EDIT

ADA

AGE SELECT

Word Clock Setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

-30

9-16

-40

FREQ

SOLO

+10

WORD IN/ OUT Con n ectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

-60

Settin g th e Master Word Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

-10

EQ EDIT

Settin g th e V M 2 00 as M a ster or Slave. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

SOLO

Mu ltitrack Recordin g an d Masterin g to a D A T . . . . . . . . 164

GAIN

EQ/LO-MID

IRECT SENDs . . . . . . . . 166

Digital I/ Os . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

-10

EQ EDIT

Digital I/ Os . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

-20

FREQ

SOLO

+10

ADAT IN/ OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

-30

-40

Usin g ADAT IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

-10

EQ EDIT

Usin g ADAT OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

-20

SOLO

ss i gn in g Ch a n n els to A D A T

S/ P DIF IN/ OUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

-10

EQ EDIT

Usin g S/ P DIF OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

-20

Usin g S/ P DIF IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

SOLO

A s s i gn in g S/ P DIF Sign als to Ch an n els. . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

-30

-40

-10

EQ EDIT

Cascadin g th e VM200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

-20

SOLO

+10

-30

-40

-10

-20

+10

-30

-40

AIR/

-10

GROUP

-20

METER

+10

CHANNEL/

-30

-40

MMC SEND

VM200 User’s Guide

159

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Digital Connections

Digital Connections, Word Clocks, and Sam ple Rates

Th e VM200 is equ ipped with two types of digital con n ectors: an

ADAT in terface an d S/ P DIF In an d Ou t con n ectors.

Th ese con n ectors en able you to in terface th e VM200 to oth er digital

com pon en ts in you r recordin g stu dio. You can u se th e ADAT in ter -

face to con n ect to an y ADAT-com patible recorder, su ch as th e FOS-

TEX VR800 or an Alesis ADAT. For m ore in form ation “ADAT IN/ OUT”

on page 165 an d “S / P DIF IN/ OUT” on page 168.

Th is section reviews som e basic issu es involved in setting u p a digital

recordin g environm ent. (If you ’ve worked with digital au dio equ ipm ent

before, you are probably already fam iliar with word clock syn chron i-

zation issu es and can skip this section .)

Th e followin g illu stration sh ows a typical waveform . Tech n ically, th is

graph represen ts force alon g th e vertical axis (i.e., th e force an au dio

speaker requ ires to m ove a certain am ou n t of air to create sou n d),

an d time alon g th e h orizon tal axis. Th e waveform is an an alogy for th e

sou n dwave position at speciﬁc poin ts in tim e.

(Mu sically, h owever, this waveform cou ld represen t you r next big hit :-)

force

time

A digital-to-an alog (D/ A) au dio con verter takes n u m erou s tin y sam -

ples of su ch a waveform each secon d, an d con verts th e sam ple data

to digital bin ary digital in form ation .

Th e n u m ber of sam ples taken each secon d is called th e “sam ple rate.”

Th e VM200, like m an y cu rren t digital devices, can sam ple at a rate of

44,100 tim es per secon d (44.1kHz) or 48,000 tim es per secon d

(48kHz).

Each tim e th e con verter sam ples th e waveform , it records waveform

data as a bin ary n u m ber in a form at called a “word.” A bit is a u n it of

data, a sin gle digit in a word, th e “on e-or -zero,” “on -or -off” fu n da-

m en tal en codin g of th e digital u n iverse. For in stan ce,

1011011110111001 is a 16-bit bin ary word. It con tain s 16 digits or

“bits” of data. If you are u sin g 16-bit words, you r system is said to

h ave a bit-rate of 16 bits. (Th is is also called th e “bit resolu tion .”)

A word clock is a clock sign al th at you can u se to syn ch ron ize all th e

devices in a digital au dio system . If th e VM200 is th e on ly digital

au dio com pon en t in you r stu dio, you don ’t n eed to worry abou t set-

tin g th e word clock. (Th e VM200 will syn ch ron ize to its own in tern al

word clock.)

However, if you u se a secon d digital device, su ch as a DAT or digital

m u ltitrack recorder, you m u st design ate on e device th e word clock

ma s ter an d th e rest s la ves . You m ay n eed to ch an ge word clock set-

tin gs on occasion , su ch as wh en you record from a DAT or CD player.

If th e word clocks are n ot correctly syn ch ron ized th rou gh ou t you r

160

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Digital Connections, Word Clocks, and Sample Rates

system , n oise or glitch es m ay creep in to you r m ixes.

Each device in a digital system m ay u tilize a differen t word len gth ,

becau se m ost digital devices are capable of in terpretin g words an d

tru n catin g or protractin g th eir len gth .

However, it is im portan t th at every com pon en t in you r digital au dio

system do two th in gs:

❑ u tilize th e sam e sam ple rate (44.1 or 48kHz)

❑ syn ch ron ize with a design ated word clock m aster.

Not e: Word clocks differ from SMPTE or MIDI tim ecode, wh ich are u sed

to syn ch ron ize MIDI sequ en cers an d au dio recorders. Word clocks syn -

ch ron ize th e digital au dio processin g circu its in each digital au dio device.

Th e word clock sign al ru n s at th e sam e frequ en cy as th e sam plin g

rate. Th e VM200 gen erates its own word clock at 44.1 kHz (th e

in du stry-stan dard sam plin g rate for m u sic CDs) an d can be u sed as

th e word clock m aster. (In gen eral, if you r work is destin ed for CD, it

is probably best to u se th e 44.1 kHz sam pling rate.)

Altern atively, you can u se th e VM200 as a word clock slave syn ch ro-

n ized to an extern al word clock in th e ran ge of 44.1kHz to 48kHz,

+/ -6%.

Be aware of th e followin g word clock gu idelin es:

❑ You can distribu te word clock sign als via dedicated cables or derive

th em from stan dard digital au dio con n ection s.

❑ If all devices sh are a com m on word clock, leave all th e devices pow-

ered on , even if th ey’re n ot bein g u sed.

❑ First tu rn on th e word clock m aster, th en th e slaves.

❑ Wh en you sh u t down th e system , ﬁrst tu rn off th e slaves, th en th e

m aster.

❑ Before a recordin g session , m ake su re th at all word clock slaves are

syn ch ron ized to th e m aster word clock.

For m ore in form ation , refer to th e docu m en tation for each device.

VM200 User’s Guide

161

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Digital Connections

Word Clock Setup

Th e VM200’s in tern al word clock gen erator su pports a sam plin g fre-

qu en cy of 44.1kHz, th e au dio stan dard for m u sic CDs.

You m ay also syn ch ron ize th e VM200 to an extern al word clock.

WORD IN/ OUT Connectors

Th ese BNC con n ectors receive/ tran sm it th e word clock. You can

con n ect a device th at h as a WORD IN/ OUT con n ector, su ch as th e

Fostex VR800 digital m u ltitrack recorder, to th ese con n ectors.

If th e VM200 is th e last device in th e word clock ch ain , set th e word

clock term in ation switch to ON.

WORD

WORD IN/OUT

ON OFF

OUT

word clock termination switch

Setting the Master Word Clock

Follow th e steps below to set th e m aster word clock.

^1.Press t h e [SYSTEM] k ey.

Th e VM200 displays th e SYSTEM fu n ction page.

^2.Rot at e t h e EQ/ LO Gain con t rol t o select a m ast er clock from

t h e followin g opt ion s:

Select this option to use the VM200 as the word clock

master.

INT44

Select this option to use the VM200 as a word clock slave,

syncing to the clock from an ADAT-compatible machine

running at 44.1kHz.

ADAT44

ADAT48

S/PDIF44

S/PDIF48

Select this option to use the VM200 as a word clock slave,

syncing to the clock from an ADAT-compatible pro audio

machine running at 48kHz.

Select this option to use the VM200 as a word clock slave,

syncing to the clock from a CD player or S/PDIF-compati-

ble machine running at 44.1kHz.

Select this option to use the VM200 as a word clock slave,

syncing to the clock from a connected CD player or

S/P DIF-compatible machine running at 48kHz.

162

VM200 UserÕs Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting the VM200 as Master or Slave

Select this option to use the VM200 as a word clock slave,

syncing to the clock from a connected FOSTEX VR800

digital multitrack recorder, or a digital device equipped with

a WORD OUT connector, running at 44.1kHz.

WORD44

WORD48

Select this option to use the VM200 as a word clock slave,

syncing to the clock coming from a connected digital

device equipped with a WORD OUT connector that is run-

ning at 48kHz.

Cau t ion : Selectin g an in appropriate sam plin g frequ en cy will in terfere

with n orm al recordin g an d playback.

Not e: If th e VM200 is on ly th e digital device in you r system , u se th e

defau lt settin g of INT44.

^3.Press t h e [ENTER] k ey t o con ﬁ rm you r select ion .

Th e VM200 displays th e previou s fu n ction page.

^4.If you select an y opt ion ot h er t h an “INT4 4 ” in st ep 2 , an d t h e

VM2 0 0 is t h e last device in t h e word clock ch ain , t u rn t h e

WORD IN Term in at ion ON/ OFF swit ch t o ON on t h e rear

pan el.

WORD

ON OFF

OUT

WORD IN Termination ON/OFF switch

Setting the VM200 as Master or Slave

Th e followin g exam ples illu strate th e VM200 in variou s recordin g

con ﬁgu ration s, bein g u sed as both word clock m aster an d word clock

slave.

Recording to a Digital Multitrack Recorder or DAT

In th is exam ple, a stereo sign al is recorded to a DAT recorder. Th e

VM200 is th e word clock m aster; th e DAT recorder is th e word clock

slave. Set th e Master Word Clock param eter on th e VM200 to “INT44.”

Th e VM200 will gen erate th e word clock an d th e DAT recorder will

slave to it.

VM200 is the w ord clock MASTER

S/PDIF OUT

INPUT

MONITOR

PHONES

2TRK IN

PAD

26dB

TRIM

26dB

TRIM

26dB

TRIM

26dB

TRIM

GAIN

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-10

-50

-10

-50

-10

-50

-10

-50

MIN

MAX

MIN

MAX

+10

METER

-3

-6

-9

-12

-18

-24

-36

-48

VM200

DIGITAL RECORDING MIXER

DIGITAL INPUT

ST BUSS/SOLO

PAGE SELECT

1-8 ANALOG IN

9-16 ADAT IN

17-20 EFF RTN

SETUP

EQ/LO

GAIN

EQ/LO-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI

GAIN

SELECTED EQ

EFF EDIT

SYSTEM

MIDI

EFF1

EFF2

EQ ON

EQ LIBRARY

EFF LIBRARY

FREQ

CURRENT SCENE STATUS

RECALL

STORE

RECALL

STORE

PAN

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

KEY MODE

ROUTING/

PHASE

AIR/

GROUP

REC BUSS

SOLO

SCENE MEMORY

RECALL STORE

SOLO

MMC SEND

CHANNEL/

METER

CH VIEW

FADER MODE

AUX1

AUX3

EFF1

AUX2

AUX4

EFF2

/-1

+1/

EXIT

DATA

+10

ADD.AUX

-10

-20

-10

-20

-30

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

ENTER

CHANNEL

-20

-40

-60

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

ANALOG IN

ADA IN

EFF RTN

MASTER

VM200 User’s Guide

163

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Digital Connections

Mixing a CD Source and Recording to a Digital Multitrack Recorder

In th is exam ple, a sign al from a CD player is m ixed with a sign al from

an ADAT-com patible digital m u ltitrack recorder, su ch as th e Fostex

VR800, an d recorded to th e digital m u ltitrack recorder.

Th e CD player serves as th e word clock m aster, an d u ses a sam plin g

frequ en cy of 44.1kHz. Th e VM200 an d th e digital m u ltitrack recorder

are word clock slaves, both syn cin g to th e CD player word clock.

Set th e Master Word Clock param eter on th e VM200 to “SPDIF44.”

The VM200 is w ord clock SLAVE.

Word Clock Master

INPUT

MONITOR

PHONES

S/PDIF OUT

2TRK IN

PAD

CD player

26dB

TRIM

26dB

TRIM

26dB

TRIM

26dB

TRIM

GAIN

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-10

-50

-10

-50

-10

-50

-10

-50

MIN

MAX

MIN

MAX

+10

S/PDIF IN

METER

-3

-6

-9

-12

-18

-24

-36

-48

VM200

DIGITAL RECORDING MIXER

ST BUSS/SOLO

AGE SELECT

Digital in

1-8 ANALOG IN

17-20 EFF RTN

ADAT OUT

ADAT IN

SETUP

EQ/LO

GAIN

EQ/LO-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI

GAIN

SELECTED EQ

EFF EDIT

SYSTEM

MIDI

EFF1

EFF2

EQ ON

EQ LIBRARY

EFF LIBRARY

FREQ

CURRENT SCENE STATUS

RECALL

STORE

RECALL

STORE

OPTICAL

ACCESS

PAN

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

KEY MODE

ROUTING/

PHASE

AIR/

SYNC

GROUP

REC BUSS

SOLO

SCENE MEMORY

RECALL STORE

SOLO

MMC SEND

RECORD TRACK

CHANNEL/

METER

CH VIEW

Digital out

Digital MTR

AUTO RTN

CLIPBOARD

EXIT

EXECUTE

AUTO PUNCH

YES

START

OUT

END

OUT

FADER MODE

AUX1

AUX3

EFF1

AUX2

AUX4

EFF2

/-1

+1/

PREVIEW

EJECT

HOLD/

STORE

EDIT

UNDO

REDO

DISP SEL

SETUP

EXIT

DATA

PGM SEL

+10

AUTO RTN

AUTO PLA

JOG

SHUTTLE

ADD.AUX

ARI PITCH

LOCATE

TIME BASE SEL

SCRUB

-10

-20

-10

SHIFT

P.EDIT

LOC MEM

-20

-30

-10

-20

-10

ENTER

CHANNEL

-20

RECORD

STOP

PLAY

REW

FWD

-40

-60

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

CLIPBOARD PLAY

LOCATE ABS

LOCATE REC END

AUTO

PUNCH

WORD OUT

WORD IN

ANALOG IN

ADA IN

EFF RTN

MASTER

Multitrack Recording and Mastering to a DAT

In th is exam ple, an au dio sign al is recorded to an ADAT-com patible

digital m u ltitrack recorder, su ch as th e Fostex VR800, wh ile also

bein g m ixed from th e digital m u ltitrack, an d sen t to a DAT m aster

recorder.

Th e digital m u ltitrack recorder is th e word clock m aster. Th e VM200

an d th e DAT m ach in e slave to it.

Set th e Master Word Clock param eter on th e VM200 to “ADAT44” or

“ADAT 48,” depen din g on th e sam plin g frequ en cy of th e digital m u l-

titrack recorder.

(If you are u sin g th e Fostex VR800 digital m u ltitrack recorder, set th is

param eter to “ADAT44.”)

The VM200 is w ord clock SLAVE.

INPUT

MONITOR

PHONES

2TRK IN

S/PDIF OUT

PAD

26dB

TRIM

26dB

TRIM

26dB

TRIM

26dB

TRIM

GAIN

DAT

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-10

-50

-10

-50

-10

-50

-10

-50

MIN

MAX

MIN

MAX

+10

METER

S/PDIF IN

-3

-6

-9

-12

-18

-24

-36

-48

VM200

DIGITAL RECORDING MIXER

ST BUSS/SOLO

PAGE SELECT

1-8 ANALOG IN

9-16 ADAT IN

17-20 EFF RTN

Digital in

ADAT OUT

ADAT IN

SETUP

EQ/LO

GAIN

EQ/LO-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI

GAIN

SELECTED EQ

EFF EDIT

SYSTEM

MIDI

EFF1

EFF2

EQ ON

EQ LIBRARY

EFF LIBRARY

FREQ

OPTICAL

CURRENT SCENE STATUS

RECALL

STORE

RECALL

STORE

ACCESS

PAN

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

KEY MODE

SYNC

ROUTING/

PHASE

PAIR/

GROUP

REC BUSS

SOLO

SCENE MEMORY

RECALL STORE

SOLO

MMC SEND

RECORD TRACK

CHANNEL/

METER

CH VIEW

Digital out

AUTO RTN

CLIPBOARD

EXIT

EXECUTE

AUTO PUNCH

YES

START

OUT

END

OUT

Digital MTR

FADER MODE

AUX1

AUX3

EFF1

AUX2

AUX4

EFF2

/-1

+1/

PREVIEW

EJECT

HOLD/

STORE

EDIT

UNDO

REDO

DISP SEL

SETUP

EXIT

PGM SEL

+10

AUTO RTN

AUTO PLA

JOG

SHUTTLE

VARI PITCH

LOCATE

TIME BASE SEL

SCRUB

ADD.AUX

-10

-20

-10

SHIFT

P.EDIT

LOC MEM

-20

-30

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

ENTER

CHANNEL

RECORD

STOP

PLAY

REW

FWD

-20

-40

-60

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

CLIPBOARD PLA

LOCATE ABS

LOCATE REC END

AUTO

PUNCH

WORD OUT

WORD IN

ANALOG IN

ADA IN

EFF RTN

MASTER

Word Clock Master

164

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Digital I/Os

Digital I/ Os

Th e VM200 featu res two types of digital in s an d ou ts: ADAT IN/ OUT

an d S/ PDIF IN/ OUT.

ADAT IN/ OUT

ADAT

OUT

ADAT is a digital au dio form at developed by th e Alesis Corporation

th at en ables eigh t ch an n els of digital au dio to ﬂow th rou gh a sin gle

optical cable.

It in clu des eigh t digital in pu ts an d eigh t assign able digital ou tpu ts

an d can be directly con n ected to digital m u ltitrack recorders.

You can connect an y ADAT-com patible recorder to these con nectors,

inclu ding an Alesis ADAT, Alesis ADAT-XT, Fostex VR-800, and others.

Using ADAT IN

You can u se an optical cable to conn ect the ADAT IN connector on th e

VM200 to the ADAT Ou t connector on an Alesis ADAT or other

ADAT-com patible device, su ch as the Fostex VR800.

Th e sign al, wh ich carries eigh t-ch an n el data from th e ADAT IN con -

n ector, will be assign ed to in pu t ch an n els 9 th rou gh 16 on th e VM200.

INPUT

MONITOR

PHONES

2TRK IN

PAD

26dB

TRIM

26dB

TRIM

26dB

TRIM

26dB

TRIM

GAIN

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-10

-50

-10

-50

-10

-50

-10

-50

MIN

MAX

MIN

MAX

+10

METER

-3

-6

-9

-12

-18

-24

-36

-48

VM200

ADAT IN

DIGITAL RECORDING MIXER

ST BUSS/SOLO

OPTICAL

ACCESS

PAGE SELECT

1-8 ANALOG IN

9-16 ADAT IN

17-20 EFF RTN

SYNC

DATA OUT

SETUP

EQ/LO

GAIN

EQ/LO-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI

GAIN

SELECTED EQ

EFF EDIT

SYSTEM

MIDI

EFF1

EFF2

RECORD TRACK

EQ ON

EQ LIBRARY

EFF LIBRARY

FREQ

CURRENT SCENE STATUS

RECALL

STORE

RECALL

STORE

AUTO RTN

CLIPBOARD

EXIT

EXECUTE

AUTO PUNCH

START

OUT

END

OUT

YES

PAN

VR800

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

PREVIEW

EJECT

KEY MODE

ROUTING/

PHASE

AIR/

WORD IN

HOLD/

STORE

EDIT

UNDO

REDO

DISP SEL

SETUP

GROUP

REC BUSS

SOLO

SCENE MEMORY

RECALL STORE

SOLO

MMC SEND

PGM SEL

CHANNEL/

METER

AUTO RTN

AUTO PLA

JOG

SHUTTLE

CH VIEW

VARI PITCH

LOCATE

TIME BASE SEL

SCRUB

SHIFT

P.EDIT

LOC MEM

RECORD

STOP

PLAY

REW

FWD

FADER MODE

WORD OUT

AUX1

AUX3

EFF1

AUX2

AUX4

EFF2

/-1

+1/

CLIPBOARD PLA

LOCATE ABS

LOCATE REC END

AUTO

PUNCH

EXIT

DATA

+10

ADD.AUX

-10

-20

-10

-20

-30

-10

-20

-10

ENTER

CHANNEL

-20

-40

-60

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

ANALOG IN

ADA IN

EFF RTN

MASTER

In th is exam ple, a Fostex VR800 is con n ected to th e ADAT IN con -

n ector on th e VM200 to m ix from a digital sou rce.

Th e VR800 serves as th e word clock m aster; th e VM200 is th e word

clock slave. Th e VR800 WORD OUT con n ector tran sm its th e word

clock to th e WORD IN con n ector on th e VM200.

Set th e Word Clock param eter on th e VM200 to “WORD44,” an d m ake

su re th at th e WORD IN switch on th e rear pan el is tu rn ed on .

If a con n ected ADAT-com patible device does n ot h ave a WORD OUT

con n ector, set th e Word Clock param eter on th e VM200 to “ADAT44”

or “ADAT48” depen din g on th e sam plin g frequ en cy of th e sou rce.

For m ore in form ation on th e m aster word clock setu p, refer to “Settin g

th e Master Word Clock” on page 162.

VM200 UserÕs Guide

165

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Digital Connections

Using ADAT OUT

You can u se an optical cable to con n ect th e ADAT OUT con n ector on

th e VM200 to an ADAT-com patible recorder, su ch as th e Fostex

VR800 digital m u ltitrack recorder.

Th e ADAT OUT con n ector ou tpu ts th e sam e in form ation as th e REC

BUSS, bu t in digital form . Th e left ch an n el of th e REC BUSS stereo

sign al is ou tpu t to tracks 1, 3, 5, an d 7, an d th e righ t ch an n el to

tracks 2, 4, 6, an d 8.

You can sen d ch an n el 1–8 sign als to ADAT DIRECT u sin g th e ROUTING

fu n ction page. Th e ch an n el 1 sign al is ou tpu t to ADAT track 1, th e

ch an n el 2 sign al is ou tpu t to ADAT track 2, etc.

optical cable

INPUT

MONITOR

PHONES

2TRK IN

PAD

26dB

TRIM

26dB

TRIM

26dB

TRIM

26dB

TRIM

GAIN

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-10

-50

-10

-50

-10

-50

-10

-50

MIN

MAX

MIN

MAX

+10

METER

-3

-6

OPTICAL

-9

-12

-18

-24

-36

-48

ACCESS

VM200

DIGITAL RECORDING MIXER

ST BUSS/SOLO

SYNC

DATA IN

RECORD TRACK

AGE SELECT

1-8 ANALOG IN

17-20 EFF RTN

AUTO RTN

CLIPBOARD

EXIT

EXECUTE

AUTO PUNCH

SETUP

EQ/LO

GAIN

EQ/LO-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI

GAIN

SELECTED EQ

EFF EDIT

YES

START

OUT

END

OUT

SYSTEM

MIDI

EFF1

EFF2

EQ ON

PREVIEW

EJECT

EQ LIBRARY

EFF LIBRARY

FREQ

CURRENT SCENE STATUS

HOLD/

STORE

EDIT

UNDO

REDO

DISP SEL

SETUP

RECALL

STORE

RECALL

STORE

ADAT OUT

VR800

PGM SEL

PAN

AUTO RTN

AUTO PLA

JOG

SHUTTLE

ARI PITCH

LOCATE

TIME BASE SEL

SCRUB

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

KEY MODE

ROUTING/

PHASE

AIR/

GROUP

SHIFT

P.EDIT

LOC MEM

REC BUSS

SOLO

SCENE MEMORY

RECALL STORE

SOLO

MMC SEND

CHANNEL/

METER

RECORD

STOP

PLAY

REW

FWD

CH VIEW

CLIPBOARD PLA

LOCATE ABS

LOCATE REC END

AUTO

PUNCH

FADER MODE

AUX1

AUX3

EFF1

AUX2

AUX4

EFF2

/-1

+1/

EXIT

DATA

+10

ADD.AUX

-10

-20

-10

-20

-30

-10

-20

-10

ENTER

CHANNEL

-20

-40

-60

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

ANALOG IN

ADA IN

EFF RTN

MASTER

In th is con ﬁgu ration , th e VM200 is th e word clock m aster an d th e

m u ltitrack recorder or ADAT is th e slave.

Set th e Word Clock param eter on th e VM200 to “INT44.”

For m ore in form ation on th e m aster word clock setu p, refer to “Set-

tin g th e Master Word Clock” on page 162.

To rou te a digital sign al to ADAT OUT, follow th e steps below:

Assigning Channels to ADAT DIRECT SENDs

Not e: Th e VM200 is u n able to rou te sign als from ch an n els 9–16 (ADAT

IN) an d ch an n els 17–20 (EFF TN) to th e ADAT DIRECT SEND.

^1.Press t h e Page Select [1 –8 ANALOG IN] k ey t o select t h e 1 –8

ch an n el layer.

Th e [1–8 ANALOG IN] key ligh ts u p.

^2.Press t h e [ROUTING/ PHASE] k ey.

Th e VM200 displays th e 1: ROUTING fu n ction page. Th e [ROUT-

ING/ PHASE] key an d selectable [EQ EDIT] keys ﬂash ; selected [EQ

EDIT] keys ligh t u p.

Th e ROUTING fu n ction page featu res a 3-by-20 m atrix. Th e top row

of th e m atrix, labelled “DIRECT,” in dicates wh ich ch an n els h ave

been sen t to th e ADAT OUT.

166

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Assigning Channels to ADAT DIRECT SENDs

3. Use t h e [EQ EDIT] k eys t o t u rn on t h e ch an n els you wish t o

sen d t o t h e ADAT OUT.

Selected [EQ EDIT] keys ligh t u p. On th e display, th e “DIRECT”

in dicators h igh ligh t (darken ).

In th e exam ple above, ch an n els 1–8 are sen t directly to th e corre-

spon din g ADAT ch an n els.

^4.Press t h e [CHANNEL/ METER] k ey.

Th e VM200 displays th e CHANNEL EDIT fu n ction page.

Not e: Th e Rec Bu ss also sen ds th e left sign al to ch an n els 1, 3, 5 an d

7, an d th e righ t sign al to ch an n els 2, 4, 6 an d 8 so th at you can rou te

th em to ADAT OUT 1–8 directly. Th is con ﬁgu ration en ables you to sen d

two m ixes to two differen t extern al recorders at th e sam e tim e.

VM200 User’s Guide

167

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Digital Connections

S/ P DIF IN/ OUT

S/P DIF

OUT

Th e VM200 featu res S/ P DIF digital in an d ou t con n ectors on th e rear

pan el.

“S/ PDIF” is an abbreviation for th e Son y/ Ph ilips Digital In terFace, a

digital form at th at en ables two ch an n els of digital au dio to ﬂow

th rou gh an RCA con n ector (coaxial) or an optical cable. Th e VM200

requ ires an optical S/ P DIF con n ection .

Using S/ P DIF OUT

Th e VM200 ou tpu ts th e ST BUSS sign al in digital S/ P DIF form at

from th e S/ P DIF Ou t optical con n ector on th e rear pan el.

You can con n ect th is ou tpu t to an y digital device th at featu res an

S/ P DIF Optical in pu t, su ch as a DAT recorder or Min iDisc recorder

to m ixdown in stereo.

You can also con n ect th e S/ P DIF ou t to th e S/ P DIF IN of an oth er

VM 2 00 i n a cascade con ﬁgu ration . See “C ascadin g th e V M 2 00” on

page 171 for m ore in fo r m at i on .

INPUT

MONITOR

PHONES

2TRK IN

PAD

26dB

TRIM

26dB

TRIM

26dB

TRIM

26dB

TRIM

GAIN

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-10

-50

-10

-50

-10

-50

-10

-50

MIN

MAX

MIN

MAX

+10

METER

-3

-6

DIGITAL IN

S/P DIF OUT

-9

-12

-18

-24

-36

-48

VM200

DIGITAL RECORDING MIXER

ST BUSS/SOLO

AGE SELECT

DAT

1-8 ANALOG IN

17-20 EFF RTN

SETUP

EQ/LO

GAIN

EQ/LO-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI

GAIN

SELECTED EQ

EFF EDIT

SYSTEM

MIDI

EFF1

EFF2

EQ ON

EQ LIBRARY

EFF LIBRARY

FREQ

CURRENT SCENE STATUS

RECALL

STORE

RECALL

STORE

PAN

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

KEY MODE

ROUTING/

PHASE

AIR/

GROUP

REC BUSS

SOLO

SCENE MEMORY

RECALL STORE

SOLO

MMC SEND

CHANNEL/

METER

CH VIEW

FADER MODE

AUX1

AUX3

EFF1

AUX2

AUX4

EFF2

/-1

+1/

EXIT

DATA

+10

ADD.AUX

-10

-20

-10

-20

-30

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

ENTER

CHANNEL

-40

-60

optical cable

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

ANALOG IN

ADA IN

EFF RTN

MASTER

In th is exam ple, th e VM200 S/ P DIF ou tpu t is con n ected to th e digital

in pu t of a DAT recorder for digital m ixdown recordin g.

Th e VM200 serves as th e word clock m aster; th e DAT is a word clock

slave. Set th e “Master Word Clock” param eter on th e V200 to “INT44.”

Refer to “Settin g th e Master Word Clock” on page 162 for m ore in for -

m ation .

If you select th e digital in pu t on th e DAT recorder as th e recordin g

sou rce, th e DAT sh ou ld au tom atically syn ch ron ize to th e word clock

sign al from th e VM200. On som e DAT recorders, you m ay n eed to

specify th e word clock sou rce. Refer to th e in stru ction s su pplied with

you r DAT recorder.

Not e: If th e con n ected digital device h as on ly th e COAXIAL (RCA pin )

jack as a digital in pu t, u se a Fostex COP-1 (an optical-to-coaxial con -

verter).

168

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using S/P DIF IN

Not e: Make su re th at sign als are rou ted to ST Bu ss so th at th ey are

also ou tpu t to th e S/ P DIF OUT. (See “Rou tin g In pu t Ch an n els” on

page 66 for m ore in form ation .)

Using S/ P DIF IN

You can con n ect th e S/ P DIF ou tpu t from a CD player, DAT, or Min i-

Disc player to th e S/ P DIF IN optical con n ector on th e rear pan el of

th e VM200.

You can also con n ect th e S/ P DIF ou tpu t from a s econd VM200 to th e

S/ P DIF IN optical con n ector in a cascade con ﬁgu ration . See “Cascad-

in g th e VM200” on page 171 f or m ore in fo r m at i on .

INPUT

MONITOR

PHONES

2TRK IN

PAD

26dB

TRIM

26dB

TRIM

26dB

TRIM

26dB

TRIM

GAIN

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-10

-50

-10

-50

-10

-50

-10

-50

MIN

MAX

MIN

MAX

+10

METER

DIGITAL OUT

S/P DIF IN

-3

-6

-9

-12

-18

-24

-36

-48

VM200

DIGITAL RECORDING MIXER

ST BUSS/SOLO

DAT

AGE SELECT

1-8 ANALOG IN

17-20 EFF RTN

SETUP

EQ/LO

GAIN

EQ/LO-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI

GAIN

SELECTED EQ

EFF EDIT

SYSTEM

MIDI

EFF1

EFF2

EQ ON

EQ LIBRARY

EFF LIBRARY

FREQ

CURRENT SCENE STATUS

RECALL

STORE

RECALL

STORE

PAN

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

KEY MODE

ROUTING/

PHASE

AIR/

GROUP

REC BUSS

SOLO

SCENE MEMORY

RECALL STORE

SOLO

MMC SEND

CHANNEL/

METER

CH VIEW

FADER MODE

AUX1

AUX3

EFF1

AUX2

AUX4

EFF2

/-1

+1/

EXIT

DATA

+10

ADD.AUX

-10

-20

-10

-20

-30

-10

-20

-10

optical cable

ENTER

CHANNEL

-20

-40

-60

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

ANALOG IN

ADA IN

EFF RTN

MASTER

In th is con n ection exam ple, a DAT m ach in e is con n ected to th e S/ P

DIF OUT con n ector on th e rear pan el of th e VM200 to en able m ixin g

from a digital sou rce.

Th e DAT m ach in e serves as word clock m aster, an d th e VM200 is

word clock slave. You n eed to set th e Master Word Clock settin g to

“S/ P DIF44” or “S/ P DIF48” depen din g on th e sam ple frequ en cy of th e

sou rce. For m ore in form ation on th e m aster word clock setu p, refer to

“Settin g th e Master Word Clock” on page 162.

Not e: If th e con n ected digital device h as on ly th e COAXIAL (RCA pin )

jack as a digital ou tpu t, u se a Fostex COP-1 optical-to-coaxial con verter.

Assigning S/ P DIF Signals to Channels

Follow th ese steps to assign a two-ch an n el digital stereo sign al (in pu t

via S/ P DIF IN) to speciﬁc ch an n els:

^1.Press t h e [ROUTING/ PHASE] k ey t wice.

Th e [ROUTING/ PHASE] key an d selectable [EQ EDIT] keys ﬂash , an d

th e VM200 displays th e 2:S/ P DIF IN fu n ction page.

VM200 User’s Guide

169

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Digital Connections

^2.Press t h e [EQ EDIT] k eys for ch an n els t o wh ich you wish t o

sen d t h e S/ P DIF sign al.

You can assign m u ltiple ch an n els.

Not e: Sin ce S/ P DIF carries a two-ch an n el sign al, you m u st always set

th e ch an n els in pairs. For exam ple, if you select ch an n el 1 to assign S/ P

DIF sign al, ch an n el 2 will be also selected an d paired. You do n ot n eed

to pair th e ch an n els u sin g th e Pairin g fu n ction in th is case.

On th e display, th e in dicators for th e assign ed ch an n el pairs

h igh ligh t (darken ), an d th eir [EQ EDIT] keys ligh t u p in paired u n i-

son .

In th e exam ple above, ch an n els 7–8 are assign ed to receive th e

S/ P DIF sign al.

^3.Press t h e [CHANNEL/ METER] k ey or [EXIT] k ey.

Th e VM200 displays th e CHANNEL EDIT fu n ction page.

170

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Cascading the VM200

You can con n ect u p to th ree VM200s togeth er in a cascade con ﬁgu -

ration to en able 36-plu s ch an n els of digital m ixin g. A two-m ixer cas-

cade is illu strated below.

S/P DIF OUT

S/P DIF IN

INPUT

MONITOR

PHONES

INPUT

MONITOR

PHONES

2TRK IN

PAD

26dB

TRIM

26dB

TRIM

26dB

TRIM

26dB

TRIM

26dB

TRIM

26dB

TRIM

26dB

TRIM

26dB

TRIM

GAIN

TRIM

GAIN

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-10

-50

-10

-50

-10

-50

-10

-50

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-16

-60

-34

-10

-50

-10

-50

-10

-50

-10

-50

MIN

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

MAX

+10

METER

-3

-6

-3

-6

-9

-12

-18

-24

-36

-48

-12

-18

-24

-36

-48

VM200

DIGITAL RECORDING MIXER

ST BUSS/SOLO

PAGE SELECT

1-8 ANALOG IN

9-16 ADAT IN

17-20 EFF RTN

1-8 ANALOG IN

9-16 ADAT IN

17-20 EFF RTN

SETUP

EQ/LO

GAIN

EQ/LO-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI

GAIN

SELECTED EQ

EFF EDIT

SETUP

EQ/LO

GAIN

EQ/LO-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI-MID

GAIN

EQ/HI

GAIN

SELECTED EQ

EFF EDIT

SYSTEM

MIDI

EFF1

EFF2

SYSTEM

MIDI

EFF1

EFF2

EQ ON

EQ LIBRARY

EFF LIBRARY

EQ LIBRARY

EFF LIBRARY

FREQ

CURRENT SCENE STATUS

RECALL

STORE

RECALL

STORE

RECALL

STORE

RECALL

STORE

PAN

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

EQ EDIT

SOLO

KEY MODE

ROUTING/

PHASE

AIR/

ROUTING/

PHASE

AIR/

GROUP

REC BUSS

SOLO

SCENE MEMORY

RECALL STORE

REC BUSS

SOLO

SCENE MEMORY

RECALL STORE

SOLO

MMC SEND

CHANNEL/

METER

CHANNEL/

METER

CH VIEW

FADER MODE

AUX1

AUX3

EFF1

AUX2

AUX4

EFF2

/-1

+1/

AUX1

AUX3

EFF1

AUX2

AUX4

EFF2

/-1

+1/

EXIT

DATA

+10

ADD.AUX

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

-20

-30

-20

-30

-10

-20

-10

-20

-10

ENTER

CHANNEL

-20

-40

-60

-40

-60

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

-30

-40

ANALOG IN

ADA IN

EFF RTN

ANALOG IN

ADA IN

EFF RTN

MASTER

VM200-A

VM200-B

In th is ﬁgu re, th e stereo bu ss sign al ﬂows from th e VM200-A S/ P DIF

OUT to th e VM200-B S/ P DIF IN. (S/ P DIF OUT ou tpu ts th e stereo

bu ss sign al in digital form .)

VM200-A serves as word clock m aster. Its Clock param eter is set to

INT44.

(You can access th e Clock param eter by pressin g th e [SYSTEM] key to

display th e 1:CLOCK/ MON fu n ction page as sh own below.)

Th e oth er VM200 serves as word clock slave. Its Clock param eters is

set to SPDIF44. Refer to “Settin g th e Master Word Clock” on page 162

for m ore in form ation on word clock.

To con ﬁgu re m u ltiple VM200s in a cascade, follow th ese steps:

^1.Press t h e [SYSTEM] k ey.

Th e VM200 displays th e Setu p:System 1:CLOCK/ MON fu n ction page.

^2.Rot at e t h e EQ/ LO Freq rot ary con t rol t o select on e of t h e fol-

lowin g opt ion s:

OFF

This is the default setting. The VM200s will not cascade.

The Cascade function is turned on. Channels 7 and 8 are

disabled.

ON-A

The Cascade function is turned on. Channels 15 and 16

are disabled.

ON-B

ON-C

The Cascade function is turned on. Channels 19 and 20

are disabled.

^3.Press t h e [EXIT] k ey or [CHANNEL/ METER] k ey.

VM200 User’s Guide

171

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Digital Connections

Th e VM200 exits Setu p m ode an d displays th e CHANNEL EDIT fu n c-

tion page.

Not e: Wh en you attem pt to cascade m u ltiple VM200s, be certain n ot

to assign S/ P DIF IN to an y ch an n els, or th e cascade operation will fail.

(You can ch eck assign m en ts by pressin g th e [ROUTING/ PHASE] key

twice to display th e S/ P DIF IN fu n ction page.) Refer to “Assign in g S/ P

DIF Sign als to Ch ann els” on page 169.

172

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAX

MIN

CHAPTER 11

VM200 & MIDI

EFF2

RECORDING MIXER

ORE

VM200

EFF EDIT

DIGIT

EFF1

EFF LIBRAR

RECALL

ORE

EQ ON

SELECTED EQ

EQ LIBRAR

-18

-24

REC BUSSSOLO

-36

-40

RECALL

ST BUSS/SOLO

About This Chapter

MIDI is an acron ym for Mu sical In stru m en t Digital In terface, wh ich

SOLO

EXIT

EQ/HI

GAIN

is an in tern ation al tech n ology stan dard th at facilitates th e

exch an ge of m u sical data between digital devices.

EQ EDIT

17-20 EFF RTN

Th is ch apter explain s th e MIDI-related capabilities of th e VM200,

FREQ

SOLO

in clu din g its MIDI ports an d param eters, as well as MIDI Mach in e

Con trol (MMC). Th is ch apter also featu res several illu stration s of

EQ EDIT

var

iou s system con ﬁgu ration s in volvin g MIDI.

SOLO

GAIN

EQ/HI-MID

-10

-20

EQ EDIT

ADA

AGE SELECT

-30

9-16

-40

FREQ

SOLO

+10

-60

Chapter Contents

-10

EQ EDIT

Usin g th e V M 2 00 with MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

-20

SOLO

+10

-30

GAIN

EQ/LO-MID

-40

MIDI Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

MIDI Tran sm it an d Receive Ch an n els . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Usin g Program Ch an ge Messages to Recall Scen es . . . . . . 180

EQ EDIT

Con trollin g Param eters Usin g Fostex Exclu sive Messages . 188

FREQ

SOLO

+10

-30

-40

Usin g Con trol Ch an ge Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

EQ EDIT

Bu lk Du m p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

-20

SOLO

+10

-30

Defau lt Setu p Param eters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

MMC (MIDI M a ch in e Con trol) Sen d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Fram e Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

-10

EQ EDIT

-20

SOLO

+10

-30

-40

-10

EQ EDIT

-20

SOLO

+10

-30

-40

-10

-20

+10

-30

-40

AIR/

-10

GROUP

-20

METER

+10

CHANNEL/

-30

-40

MMC SEND

VM200 User’s Guide

173

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VM200 & MIDI

Using the VM200 w ith MIDI

Usin g MIDI with th e VM200 en ables you to take fu llest advan tage of

all th e VM200’s capabilities.

You can sen d MIDI Program Ch an ge m essages to recall scen es from

Scen e Mem ory, or sen d MIDI Con trol Ch an ge m essages to en able

real-tim e param eter con trol. Fostex System Exclu sive m essages sim -

ilarly en able addition al param eter con trol.

To backu p an d tran sfer data between two VM200s, you can u se Sys-

tem Exclu sive Bu lk Du m p com m an ds.

If a recorder is con n ected to th e VM200, you can con trol it rem otely

via MIDI Mach in e Con trol (MMC).

You can also cascade m u ltiple VM200s via MIDI con n ection s an d

rem otely operate th e VM200 via MIDI Local Con trol.

MIDI Ports

Th e VM200 h as stan dard MIDI IN, MIDI OUT, an d MIDI THRU ports

on th e rear pan el.

Th e MIDI IN port receives MIDI m essages.

Th e MIDI OUT port tran sm its MIDI m essages.

Th e MIDI THRU ports tran sm its th e exact sam e MIDI m essages

received at th e MIDI IN port.

In addition to variou s MIDI in stru m en ts an d devices, you can con n ect

a person al com pu ter to th e MIDI ports u sin g a MIDI in terface.

174

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Connecting MIDI devices

The system illustrated below uses a standard MIDI interface to con-

nect the VM200, a MIDI keyboard, and a MIDI sampler to a com-

puter.

MIDI IN

serial port

MIDI sequencer

MIDI

interface

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

MIDI keyboard

MIDI sampler

VM200

CascadingTwoVM200s

In the conﬁguration illustrated below, two VM200s are cascaded

(linked) together via MIDI. This type of connection enables you, for

example, to perform the following functions on both machines while

operating only one:

• Recall, store, and change the name of scene memories

• Update the display

• Control Solo mode

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

Note: When you cascade two VM200s, be sure to set the ECHO param-

eter on 1: MIDI TX&RX page to “OFF” to avoid message loop.

VM200 User’s Guide

175

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VM200 & MIDI

MIDITransm it and Receive Channels

Th is section explain s th e MIDI Tran sm it an d Receive Ch an n els.

Press th e [MIDI] key to display th e 1:MIDI TX&RX fu nction page. Th is

page enables you to set the transm it (TX) an d Receive (RX) ch an n els

for th e VM200.

TX CH (Transm it Channel)

Th is param eter speciﬁes th e MIDI Tran sm it Ch an n el. Th is is th e

ch an n el th e VM200 will u se to tran sm it MIDI m essages. Select a

ch an n el from 1 th rou gh 16.

Set th e device th at will receive MIDI m essages from th e VM200 to th e

sam e MIDI Ch an n el.

Wh en th e VM200 receives a requ est for MIDI data, it tran sm its a

respon se on th e sam e MIDI ch an n el th at received th e requ est.

Th e defau lt settin g is “1.”

RX CH (Receive Channel)

Th is param eter speciﬁes th e MIDI Receive Ch an n el. Th is is th e ch an -

n el on wh ich th e VM200 will receive MIDI m essages. Select a ch an n el

from 1 th rou gh 16, or “Om n i.”

Set th e device th at will tran sm it MIDI m essages to th e VM200 to th e

sam e MIDI Ch an n el.

If you select OMNI for th e RX CH param eter, th e target m essages (Pro-

gram Ch an ge or Con trol Ch an ge) will be received on all ch an n els.

Th e defau lt settin g is “Om n i.”

ECHO

Th e ECHO param eter en ables you to “ech o” Program Ch an ge, Con trol

Ch an ge, or System Exclu sive m essages th at are received by th e

VM200 th rou gh to th e MIDI OUT port, regardless of th e MIDI Ch an -

n el settin gs. Th e defau lt settin g is “Off.”

176

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Program Change Messages

You can send a Program Ch ange m essage to th e VM200 to recall a

scene from th e VM200’s Scene Mem ory. (For m ore inform ation, see

“Using Program Change Messages to Recall Scenes” on page 180.)

Inversely, by recalling a scene on the VM200, you can tran sm it Pro-

gram Chan ge m essages to connected MIDI devices or instru m ents.

Program Change TX

Th e Program Ch an ge TX param eter determ in es wh eth er th e VM200

will tran sm it Program Ch an ge m essages wh en you recall a scen e from

Scen e Mem ory.

Tu rn th e Program Ch an ge TX param eter on if you wan t to ch an ge pro-

gram s on a con n ected syn th esizer wh en you ch an ge scen es on th e

VM200.

Th e defau lt settin g is “On .”

Program Change RX

Th e Program Ch an ge RX param eter determ in es wh eth er th e VM200

will recall a scen e from Scen e Mem ory wh en th e VM200 receives a

Program Ch an ge m essage.

Tu rn th e Program Ch an ge RX param eter on if you wan t to ch an ge

scen es on th e VM200 from a con n ected sequ en cer.

Th e defau lt settin g is “On .”

Program Change Table

Th e Program Ch an ge Table assign s program ch an ge n u m bers to

scen es in Scen e Mem ory.

Th ese assign m en ts en able you to sen d MIDI m essages from an exter -

n al MIDI device to recall scen es on th e VM200.

For exam ple, you cou ld assign Program Ch an ge Nu m ber 07 to Scen e

07. If you th en sen d Program Ch an ge Nu m ber 07 from a con n ected

sequ en cer to th e VM200, th e VM200 will recall Scen e 07.

Th e VM200 featu res two Program Ch an ge Tables (01 User Table, an d

02 Preset Table). You can u se th e Program Ch an ge Table param eter

to select Table 01 or 02.

Th e defau lt settin g is “01.”

For m ore in form ation , refer to th e “Program Ch an ge To Scen e Mem ory

Assign m en t Tables” on page 210.

VM200 User’s Guide

177

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VM200 & MIDI

Control Change Messages

You can sen d Con trol Ch an ge m essages to th e VM200 to con trol

VM200 param eters in real tim e. (For m ore in form ation , see “Usin g

Control C h an g e Messages” on page 184.)

In versely, wh en you adju st param eters on the VM200, the VM200 can

tran sm it Control Ch ange m essages to rem otely control the param e-

ters of con nected MIDI devices or instru m ents.

Control Change TX

Tu rn on th e Con trol Ch an ge TX param eter if you wan t th e VM200 to

tran sm it Con trol Ch an ge m essages wh en you adju st m ix param eters.

Th e defau lt settin g is “Off.”

Control Change RX

Tu rn on th e Con trol Ch an ge RX param eter if you wan t th e VM200 to

adju st m ix param eters wh en a Con trol Ch an ge m essage is received.

Th e defau lt settin g is “Off.”

Control Change Table

Th e Con trol Ch an ge Tables assign Con trol Ch an ge n u m bers to vari-

ou s con troller n u m bers.

Th ese assign m en ts en able you to sen d MIDI m essages from an exter -

n al MIDI device to con trol VM200 param eters in real tim e.

For exam ple, you cou ld assign Con trol Ch an ge n u m ber 5 to ch an n el

fader 5. If you th en sen d Con trol Ch an ge n u m ber 5 from a con n ected

device to th e VM200, th e VM200 will adju st fader 5.

Th e VM200 featu res two Con trol Ch an ge Tables (01 User Table, an d

02 Preset Table). You can u se th e Con trol Ch an ge Table param eter to

select Table 01 or 02.

Th e defau lt settin g is “01.”

For m ore in form ation , refer to th e “Con trol Ch an ge To Con trol

Param eters Assign m en t Tables” on page 211.

178

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

System Exclusive Messages (Fostex Exclusive)

You can con trol VM200 param eters in real tim e u sin g System Exclu -

sive m essages. For m ore in form ation , see System Exclu sive Param e-

ter Con trol on page 188.

If you wan t th e VM200 to receive System Exclu sive m essages, tu rn on

th e “System Exclu sive TX & RX” param eter (described below).

Th e “DevID” (device ID) sh ou ld m atch th e n u m ber selected on th e

extern al MIDI device.

System Exclusive TX & RX

Th is param eter determ in es wh eth er or n ot th e VM200 adju sts m ix

param eters wh en System Exclu sive m essages are received, or

wh eth er th e VM200 tran sm its param eter settin gs in respon se to

Param eter Requ ests.

It also determ in es wh eth er th e VM200 tran sm its System Exclu sive

m essages on th e “DevID” ch an n el wh en m ix param eters are adju sted,

or wh eth er th e VM200 tran sm its Param eter Requ ests on th e “DevID”

ch an n el.

You can set th is param eter to “On ” or “Off.” Th e defau lt settin g is

“Off.”

System Exclusive DevID

Th is param eter determ in es th e ID n u m ber of th e device to an d from

wh ich th e VM200 tran sm its an d receives System Exclu sive m essages.

You can set th is param eter to 0 – 126. Th e defau lt settin g is “0.”

Bulk Dum p

You can u se th e System Exclu sive Bu lk Du m p to tran sfer VM200 data

(su ch as Scen e Mem ory, EQ Library, Effects Library, an d Setu p data)

to an oth er MIDI device.

Th is is u sefu l for backin g-u p VM200 data to a MIDI data ﬁler or com -

pu ter, or for exch an gin g data between VM200s.

Not e: Fostex does n ot gu aran tee com patibility of MIDI Bu lk Du m p m es-

sages between two VM200s with differen t software version s.

Bulk RX

Th e Bu lk RX param eter determ in es wh eth er th e VM200 receives MIDI

Bu lk requ ests an d MIDI Bu lk Du m p m essages.

If you tu rn on th e Bu lk RX param eter, th e VM200 tran sm its Bu lk

Du m p m essages in respon se to Bu lk Du m p requ ests.

Bu lk Du m p m essages an d Bu lk Du m p requ ests are n ot ech oed.

You can tran sm it Bu lk Du m p m essages from th e VM200 regardless of

th is settin g.

See “Bu lk Du m p” on page 189 for m ore in form ation .

VM200 UserÕs Guide

179

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VM200 & MIDI

Using Program Change Messages to Recall Scenes

Wh en th e VM200 receives a MIDI Program Ch an ge, it can recall a

scen e from Scen e Mem ory. (Wh ich scen e it recalls is determ in ed by

th e Program Ch an ge Assign m en t Table. For m ore in form ation , see

page 210.)

Sim ilarly, wh en you recall a scen e on th e VM200, it can tran sm it a

Program Ch an ge m essage th at will recall a scen e on an oth er VM200.

Altern atively, th e Program Ch an ge m essage can be recorded to a

MIDI sequ en cer an d later u sed to recall a particu lar scen e au tom ati-

cally.

Scen e Mem ories 0 th rou gh 99 an d Preset Scen es P0, P1, an d P2 are

in itially assign ed to Program Ch an ges 1 th rou gh 128. However, you

can edit th ese assign m en ts u sin g th e 3:PGM. TABLE2 fu n ction page,

wh ich you can access by pressin g th e [MIDI] fu n ction key.

Th ese assign m en ts con trol both tran sm ission (TX) an d reception

(RX). For exam ple, wh en th e VM200 receives Program Ch an ge 07

from an extern al MIDI device, it will recall Scen e 07. In versely, wh en

Scen e 07 is recalled, th e VM200 will tran sm it Program Ch an ge 07.

Follow th ese steps to set u p th e VM200 to receive an d tran sm it MIDI

Program Ch an ge m essages:

^1.Press t h e [MIDI] k ey.

Th e VM200 displays th e 1:MIDI TX&RX fu n ction page.

^2.Set t h e VM2 0 0 an d t h e ext ern al MIDI device t o t h e sam e

MIDI ch an n el.

Th e external MIDI device that receives MIDI m essages from the

VM200 sh ou ld be set to th e MIDI Chan nel speciﬁed by the TX CH

param eter.

Th e RX CH param eter of the VM200 sh ou ld be set to the sam e

MIDI Ch an n el as the device transm itting MIDI m essages.

^3.Set t h e TX CH an d/ or RX CH param et ers t o ON.

Use th e EQ/ LO an d EQ/ LO-MID Gain rotary con trols. Refer to

th e illu stration below.

Program Change TX and RX are “ON.”

180

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Editing the User Program Change Assign Table

Th e VM200 featu res two Program Ch an ge Assign Tables.

Th e ﬁrst is th e User Table, wh ich appears on th e 2:PGM TABLE1 fu n ction

page. You can edit th e assign m en ts in th is table.

Th e secon d table is th e Preset Table, wh ich appears on th e 3:PGM

TABLE2 fu n ction page. You can view th e assign m en ts in th e Preset

table, bu t n ot edit th em .

Follow th e steps below to assign a Scen e Mem ory to a Program

Ch an ge n u m ber.

^1.Press t h e [MIDI] k ey t wice.

Th e VM200 displays th e 2:PGM TABLE1 fu n ction page.

^2.Select a Program Ch an ge n u m ber.

Rotate th e EQ/ LO GAIN rotary con trol to select a n u m ber from 1

th rou gh 128.

As you tu rn th e con trol, th e PGM CHG No. param eter ch an ges an d

th e Assign Table reﬂects th e ch an ge.

^3.Select a Scen e n u m ber.

Rotate th e EQ/ LO-MID GAIN rotary con trol to select a scen e n u m -

ber from P0, P1, P2, or 00 th rou gh 99.

As you tu rn th e con trol, th e SCENE No. param eter ch an ges, an d

th e Assign Table scrolls to reﬂect th e ch an ge.

VM200 User’s Guide

181

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VM200 & MIDI

View ing the Preset Program Change Assign Table

Th e Preset Program Ch an ge Assign Table appears on th e 3:PGM TABLE2

fu n ction page.

Follow th ese steps to view th e Preset assign m en ts:

^1.Press t h e [MIDI] k ey t h ree t im es.

Th e VM200 displays th e 3:PGM TABLE2 fu n ction page.

^2.Select a Program Ch an ge n u m ber.

Rotate th e EQ/ LO GAIN rotary con trol to select a n u m ber from

001 th rou gh 128.

As you tu rn th e con trol, th e PGM CHG No. param eter ch an ges,

an d th e Assign Table scrolls to reﬂect th e ch an ge.

Th e Scen e n u m ber assign ed to th e selected Program Ch an ge

n u m ber will appear n ext to it in th e Assign Table.

Program Change Assign Table Notes

Th e “Scen e Mem ory to Program Ch an ge Assign Table” appears on

page 210.

To reset th e assign m en ts to th eir in itial settin gs, press th e [SYSTEM]

key six tim es or u n til it displays th e 6:INITIALIZE fu n ction page. Tu rn

th e EQ/ LO GAIN rotary con trol to set th e INIT ITEM param eter to

“PGM TBL,” an d press th e [ENTER] key. For m ore in form ation , see

“In itializin g th e VM200” on page 197.

You can store th e Program Ch an ge Assign Table to an extern al MIDI

device, su ch as a MIDI data ﬁler, u sin g MIDI Bu lk Du m p. (See “Bu lk

Du m p” on page 179 for m ore in form ation .)

If a scen e is assign ed to two or m ore program ch an ges, th e lowest pro-

gram ch an ge is tran sm itted wh en th e scen e is recalled.

182

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Examples: Using Program Change Messages

Exam ples: Using Program Change Messages

Th e followin g ﬁgu res illu strate typical ways in wh ich to u tilize MIDI

Program Ch an ge m essages with th e VM200.

In th e followin g exam ple, if you are u sin g th e Preset Program Ch an ge

Table (wh ich appears on fu n ction page 3:PGM TABLE2), wh en you sen d

Program Ch an ge 10 from th e MIDI keyboard, th e VM200 will recall

Scen e 10, du e to preset assign m en t.

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MIDI keyboard

In th e followin g exam ple, Program Ch an ge 33 h as been program m ed

in to a son g on th e MIDI sequ en cer an d will be tran sm itted to th e

VM200 at th e speciﬁed poin t wh en th e son g is played.

If you are u sin g th e Preset Program Ch an ge Table (2), th e VM200 will

recall Scen e 33, du e to preset assign m en t.

Sin ce th e VM200 ou tpu ts Program Ch an ge m essages wh en scen es are

recalled, you can record “scen e recalls” to th e MIDI sequ en cer in real

tim e.

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

sequencer

MIDI

You can also con n ect two VM200s via MIDI an d recall a scen e on th e

ﬁrst VM200, so th at th e correspon din g Program Ch an ge m essage will

be tran sm itted to th e secon d VM200 recall th e assign ed scen e.

VM200 User’s Guide

183

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VM200 & MIDI

Using Control Change Messages

Wh en th e VM200 receives a MIDI Con trol Ch an ge m essage, it can

adju st a m ix param eter speciﬁed by th e Con trol Ch an ge Assign Table.

(For m ore in form ation , see page 211.)

Sim ilarly, wh en a m ix param eter is adju sted on th e VM200, th e

VM200 can tran sm it a Con trol Ch an ge m essage to con trol an oth er

VM200.

Altern atively, you can record Con trol Ch an ge m essages to a MIDI

sequ en cer an d u se th em later to au tom ate param eter con trol.

You can assign u p to 114 m ix param eters to Con trol Ch an ges 0

th rou gh 95 an d 102 th rou gh 119. (Du e to th e MIDI stan dard, Con trol

Ch an ges 96 th rou gh 101 are u n available.)

Th e VM200 “Con trol Ch an ge To Con trol Param eters Assign m en t

Tables” on page 211 lists in itial assign m en ts. You can edit th ese

assign m en ts u sin g th e 4:CTL TABLE1 fu n ction page.

Follow th ese steps to set u p th e VM200 to receive an d tran sm it MIDI

Con trol Ch an ge m essages:

^1.Press t h e [MIDI] k ey.

Th e VM200 displays th e 1:MIDI TX&RX fu n ction page.

^2.Set t h e VM2 0 0 an d t h e ext ern al MIDI device t o t h e sam e

MIDI ch an n el.

Th e external MIDI device that receives MIDI m essages from the

VM200 shou ld be set to th e MIDI Ch annel speciﬁed by the TX CH

param eter.

Th e RX CH param eter of th e VM200 sh ou ld be set to th e sam e

MIDI Ch an n el as th e device tran sm ittin g MIDI m essages.

^3.Set t h e TX CH an d/ or RX CH param et ers t o ON.

Use th e EQ/ LO an d EQ/ LO-MID GAIN rotary con trols. Refer to

th e illu stration below.

184

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Editing the Control Change Assign Table

Th e VM200 featu res two Con trol Ch an ge Assign Tables.

Th e ﬁrst is th e User Table, wh ich appears on th e 4:CTL TABLE1 fu n ction

page. You can edit th e assign m en ts in th is table.

Th e secon d table is th e Preset Table, wh ich appears on th e 5:CTL TABLE2

fu n ction page. You can view th e assign m en ts in th e Preset table, bu t

n ot edit th em .

Follow th e steps below to assign a con trol param eter to a Con trol

Ch an ge n u m ber.

^1.Press t h e [MIDI] k ey fou r t im es.

Th e VM200 displays th e 4:CTL TABLE1 fu n ction page.

Th e followin g page appears on th e display.

^2.Select a Con t rol Ch an ge n u m ber.

Rotate th e EQ/ LO GAIN rotary con trol to select a Con trol Ch an ge

n u m ber from 0 th rou gh 95 or 102 th rou gh 119. (Nu m bers 096

th rou gh 101 are u n available).

^3.Select t h e sect ion of t h e VM2 0 0 you wish t o con t rol wit h t h e

Con t rol Ch an ge n u m ber.

Rotate th e EQ/ LO-MID GAIN rotary con trol to select th e section

you wish to con trol with th e selected Con trol Ch an ge n u m ber.

Option s in clu de NON, CHANNEL, MASTER, EFFECT, an d SCENE

ST.

4. Select t h e su b-sect ion of t h e VM2 0 0 you wish t o con t rol.

Rotate th e EQ/ HI-MID GAIN rotary con trol to select a su b-section .

Option s in clu de CH1–20, ST BUSS, REC BUSS, AUX1–4, EFF1–2,

MODE, PST/ PRE, an d AUX PAIR. Th e available option s vary

depen din g on you r previou s selection s.

^5.Select a param et er it em you wish t o con t rol wit h t h e select ed

Con t rol Ch an ge n u m ber.

Rotate th e EQ/ HI [GAIN] rotary con trol to select a param eter item .

Th e available option s vary depen din g on you r previou s selection s.

For m ore in form ation , refer to th e “Con trol Ch an ge To Con trol

Param eters Assign m en t Tables” on page 211.

VM200 UserÕs Guide

185

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VM200 & MIDI

View ing the Preset Control Change Assign Table

Th e Preset Con trol Ch an ge Assign Table appears on th e 5:CTL TABLE2

fu n ction page.

Follow th ese steps to view th e Preset assign m en ts:

^1.Press t h e [MIDI] k ey ﬁ ve t im es.

Th e VM200 displays th e 5:CTL TABLE2 fu n ction page.

^2.Select a Con t rol Ch an ge n u m ber.

Rotate th e EQ/ LO GAIN rotary con trol to select from 0 th rou gh 95

or 102–119.

As you tu rn th e con trol, th e CTL CHG No. param eter ch an ges,

an d th e Assign Table scrolls to reﬂect th e ch an ge.

Th e param eter item assign ed to th e selected Con trol Ch an ge

n u m ber will appear n ext to it in th e Assign Table.

Control Change Assign Table Notes

Th e“Con trol Ch an ge To Con trol Param eters Assign m en t Tables” on

page 211.

To reset th e assign m en ts to th eir in itial settin gs, press th e [SYSTEM]

key six tim es or u n til it displays th e 6:INITIALIZE fu n ction page. Tu rn

th e EQ/ LO GAIN rotary con trol to set th e INIT ITEM param eter to

“CTL TBL,” an d press th e [ENTER] key. For m ore in form ation , see “In i-

tializin g th e VM200” on page 197.

You can store th e Con trol Ch an ge Assign Table to an extern al MIDI

device, su ch as a MIDI data ﬁler, u sin g MIDI Bu lk Du m p. (See “Bu lk

Du m p” on page 179 for m ore in form ation .)

If a param eter is assign ed to two or m ore con trol ch an ges, th e lowest

con trol ch an ge is tran sm itted wh en th e param eter is recalled.

186

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Examples: Using Control Change Messages

Exam ples: Using Control Change Messages

Th e followin g ﬁgu res illu strate typical ways in wh ich to u tilize MIDI

Con trol Ch an ge m essages with th e VM200.

Th e followin g exam ple assu m es you are u sin g th e Preset Con trol

Ch an ge Table (wh ich appears on fu n ction page 5:CTL TABLE2) an d th at

an assign able MIDI con troller on th e MIDI keyboard h as been

assign ed Con trol Ch an ge 83.

Wh en you adju st th e con troller, Con trol Ch an ge 83 will be tran sm it-

ted to th e VM200, wh ich will th en adju st th e effect sen d 2 level for

in pu t ch an n el 2.

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MIDI keyboard

In th e followin g exam ple, in pu t ch an n el 5 fader m ovem en ts are

recorded in real tim e to a MIDI sequ en cer u sin g Con trol Ch an ge 5.

Du rin g playback, th e sequ en cer tran sm its Con trol Ch an ge 5 back to

th e VM200 an d fader 5 m oves accordin gly, du e to preset assign m en t.

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MIDI sequencer

You can also con n ect two VM200s via MIDI to en able you to con trol

th e secon d VM200 from th e ﬁrst. For exam ple, you cou ld m ove th e

Master Fader on th e ﬁrst VM200, cau sin g th e secon d VM200 to oper -

ate its Master Fader as well.

VM200 UserÕs Guide

187

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VM200 & MIDI

Controlling Param eters Using Fostex Exclusive

Messages

You can also con trol VM200 param eters in real tim e u sin g MIDI Sys-

tem Exclu sive m essages.

Wh en you adju st a m ix param eter, th e VM200 tran sm its a System

Exclu sive Param eter Ch an ge m essage.

To tran sm it an d receive System Exclu sive m essages on th e VM200,

set th e SYSTEM EX. TX&RX param eter on th e 1:MIDI TX&RX fu n ction

page to “On ” an d set th e DevID (Device ID) param eter to m atch th e

device ID assign ed to th e extern al MIDI device.

Data form ats for Fostex Exclu sive m essages are provided in th e

Appen dix.

System Exclusive TX&RX

Device ID

188

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Bulk Dump

Bulk Dum p

Th e VM200 can tran sfer Setu p data, Scen e Mem ories, Effect an d EQ

Libraries, an d Program an d Con trol Ch an ge Assign Tables to an oth er

MIDI device u sin g th e System Exclu sive Bu lk Du m p fu n ction .

Th is fu n ction en ables you to back u p im portan t VM200 data to a MIDI

data ﬁler or com pu ter, or to tran sfer data between m u ltiple VM200s.

Th e VM200 can also receive Bu lk Du m p requ ests from oth er MIDI

devices.

Transm itting MIDI Bulk Dum p Messages

Th e VM200 tran sm its Bu lk Du m p data on th e tran sm ission ch an n el

you specify u sin g th e TX CH param eter on th e 1:MIDI TX&RX fu n ction

page.

To execu te a Bu lk Du m p operation , you specify th e data you wish to

tran sfer u sin g th e param eters on th e 6:BULK DUMP fu n ction page, th en

press th e [ENTER] key. Th e VM200 can also tran sm it data au tom ati-

cally wh en it receives MIDI Bu lk Du m p Requ est.

Th e BLOCK param eter on th e 6:BULK DUMP fu n ction page en ables you

to specify th e block of data you wish to sen d.

Follow th ese steps to execu te a Bu lk Du m p.

Autom atic transm ission in response to Bulk Dum p Request

If you set th e BLK DMP REQ. param eter on th e 1:MIDI TX&RX fu n ction

page to RX ON, th e VM200 will be able to receive a MIDI Bu lk Du m p

requ est m essage from an extern al MIDI device.

^1.Press t h e [MIDI] k ey.

Th e VM200 displays th e 1:MIDI TX&RX fu n ction page.

Bulk Dump Request RX parameter

^2.Rot at e t h e EQ/ HI GAIN rot ary con t rol t o set t h e BLK DMP

REQ param et er t o “RX ON.”

Th e defau lt settin g of th e Bu lk Du m p Requ est param eter is “RX

ON.”

Th e VM200 will tran sm it Bu lk Du m p data on th e speciﬁed MIDI

tran sm it ch an n el wh en it receives Bu lk Du m p Requ est from th e

con n ected MIDI device.

To specify wh ich data you wish to tran sm it, see “Specifyin g th e

data you wan t to tran sfer” on page 190.

VM200 UserÕs Guide

189

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VM200 & MIDI

Manual transm ission of Bulk Dum p Messages

1. Press t h e [MIDI] k ey six t im es (from st art of cycle).

Th e VM200 displays th e 6:BULK DUMP fu n ction page.

2. Press t h e [ENTER] k ey.

Th e VM200 starts tran sm ittin g Bu lk Du m p Data to th e con n ected

MIDI device an d displays th e followin g m essage:

“WARNING! Tran sm it Bu lk Du m p Data Now...”

Warn in g: Do n ot power off th e VM200 wh ile it is tran sm ittin g data or

you m ay dam age th e system or th e con n ected MIDI device.

Specifying the data you w ant to transfer

1. Press t h e [MIDI] k ey six t im es (from st art of cycle).

Th e VM200 displays th e 6: BULK DUMP fu n ction page.

2. Rot at e t h e EQ/ LO GAIN rot ary con t rol t o adju st t h e It em

param et er.

Th is param eter speciﬁes th e data you wan t th e VM200 to tran s-

fer.

3. Rot at e t h e EQ/ LO-MID GAIN rot ary con t rol t o adju st t h e

Block param et er.

Th is param eter speciﬁes th e block of data you wan t th e VM200 to

tran sfer. Th e Block param eter is available on ly if you select

SETUP, SCENE, EFF LIB, or EQ LIB for th e Item param eter.

4. Rot at e t h e EQ/ HI-MID GAIN rot ary con t rol t o adju st t h e

In t erval param et er.

Th e In terval param eter speciﬁes th e in terval between data blocks

du rin g Bu lk Du m p tran sm ission .

Item

ALL (default)

SETUP

Contents

Block

All items listed in this table

VM200 all current setup data

Scene memories

N/A

ALL, SYSTEM, MIDI, LOC MEM

ALL, CURRENT, 00–99

ALL, 50–99

SCENE

EFF LIB

Effect library user programs

190

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Receiving Bulk Dump Requests

Item

EQ LIB

Contents

Block

EQ library user programs

ALL, 50–99

Program Change Assign Table 1

(user-deﬁnable table)

PGM TBL1

CTL TBL1

N/A

Control Change Assign Table 1

(user-deﬁnable table)

If you sen d too m u ch data at on ce, you m ay overload MIDI devices

th at h ave sm all data bu ffers. Settin g a lon ger in terval will allow

slower devices to process received MIDI data.

You can u se an in terval settin g of 0 wh en you Bu lk Du m p between

m u ltiple VM200s.

You can set th e in terval from 0–500 in 10m s in crem en ts.

^5.Press t h e [ENTER] k ey t o sen d t h e speciﬁ ed Bu lk Du m p dat a

im m ediat ely, or press t h e [EXIT] k ey t o ret u rn t o t h e previou s

screen .

Receiving Bulk Dum p Requests

If th e receive ch an n el (RX CH param eter on th e 1:MIDI TX&RX fu n ction

page) an d th e DevID (device ID n u m ber) param eter on th e VM200

m atch th ose of th e sen din g device, th e sen din g device will tran sm it

th e speciﬁed Bu lk Du m p data to th e VM200.

VM200 UserÕs Guide

191

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VM200 & MIDI

MMC (MIDI Machine Control) Send

MMC is an abbreviation for MIDI Mach in e Con trol. You can con trol

MMC-com patible recorders from th e VM200 by sen din g MIDI

Mach in e Con trol (MMC) com m an ds.

In MMC Sen d m ode, th e VM200’s [ON] keys 1 th rou gh 8 fu n ction as

th e tran sport keys, store, recall keys for locate m em ories.

You can u se th e [EQ EDIT] keys an d [SOLO] keys to locate sixteen

deﬁn able locate poin ts (LOCATE 1–16).

Wh ile you h old down th e [ENTER] key, th e [SOLO] keys fu n ction as

th e record track select keys. MMC com m an ds are tran sm itted via

MIDI.

Th e followin g exam ple illu strates rem ote con trol of an MMC-com pat-

ible digital MTR (su ch as th e Fostex VR800) from th e VM200 u sin g

MMC com m an ds.

ADAT IN

ADAT OUT

ADAT IN

ADAT OUT

OPTICAL

ACCESS

SYNC

RECORD TRACK

MIDI Machine Control Data

AUTO RTN

CLIPBOARD

EXIT

EXECUTE

AUTO PUNCH

START

OUT

END

OUT

YES

PREVIEW

EJECT

HOLD/

STORE

EDIT

UNDO

REDO

DISP SEL

SETUP

PGM SEL

AUTO RTN

AUTO PLA

JOG

SHUTTLE

VARI PITCH

LOCATE

TIME BASE SEL

SCRUB

MIDI IN

SHIFT

P.EDIT

LOC MEM

RECORD

STOP

PLAY

REW

FWD

CLIPBOARD PLA

LOCATE ABS

LOCATE REC END

AUTO

PUNCH

ADAT-compatible Digital multitrack recorder

Setting the Device ID Num ber

1. Press t h e [MIDI] k ey.

Th e VM200 displays th e 1:MIDI TX&RX fu n ction page.

2. Select an ID n u m ber for t h e DevID param et er.

Rotate th e EQ/ LO-MID Freq rotary con trol to specify th e device ID

n u m ber of th e con n ected digital MTR. Select a n u m ber from 000

to 126.

Entering MMC Send Mode

3. Press t h e [ROUTING/ PHASE] k ey an d t h e [PAIR/ GROUP] k ey

sim u lt an eou sly t o en t er MMC Sen d m ode.

192

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Entering MMC Send Mode

Th e two keys ﬂash an d th e VM200 displays th e MMC SEND fu n ction

page.

Not e: Press th e [EXIT] key at an y tim e to can cel MMC Sen d m ode an d

retu rn to Ch an n el Edit m ode.

Refer to th e table below for an explan ation of th e fu n ction s an d

con trols on th e MMC SEND fu n ction page.

Key

Function

MMC Command Value

ON 1

ON 2

ON 3

ON 4

ON 5

ON 6

ON 7

ON 8

Record

Stop

Play

Rewind

Fast Forward

-----

Recalls a locate memory.

Stores a locate memory.

Locate points 1–8

EQ EDIT 1–8

SOLO 1–8

Locate points 9–16

ENTER + SOLO

1–8

Record track select 1–8

^4.Press t h e [ON] k eys 1 –6 t o t ran sm it t h e t ran sport com m an ds

t o t h e MTR.

To start recordin g on th e MTR, press th e ch an n el 1 [ON] key an d

th e ch an n el 3 [ON] key sim u ltan eou sly.

VM200 UserÕs Guide

193

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VM200 & MIDI

MMC Send and Tim ecode

Wh en sen din g Locate Tim e in MMC Sen d m ode, th e VM200 refers to

th e fram e rate set by th e Fram e Mode param eter fou n d on th e

SETUP:SYSTEM 1: CLOCK/ MON fu n ction page.

Before you can correctly set a locate tim e on th e VM200 to locate a

position on a con n ected extern al digital recorder via MMC Sen d com -

m an ds, you n eed to set th e correct fram e rate for th e tim ecode.

Th e VM200 su pports fou r fram e rates: 24, 25, 30D (drop-fram e), an d

30fps.

It is im portan t th at you set th e tim ecode fram e rate to m atch th e

m aterial recorded on th e digital recorder. Oth erwise, th e locate poin t

you set on th e VM200 will be ou t of syn c with th e recorded m aterial.

Fram e Mode

Follow th e steps below to set th e fram e rate for th e MIDI tim ecode.

^1.Press t h e [SYSTEM] k ey.

Th e system displays th e SETUP:SYSTEM 1:CLOCK/ MON fu n ction page.

FRAME MODE

^2.Specify a valu e for t h e Fram e Mode param et er by rot at in g t h e

EQ/ LO-MID Freq con t rol.

Th e Fram e Mode param eter speciﬁes th e fram e rate. Select a

fram e rate appropriate for you r project.

Th e option s in clu de 24, 25, 30DF (drop-fram e), an d 30ND

(n on -drop fram e).

Th e defau lt settin g is 24.

^3.Press t h e [CHANNEL/ METER] k ey or t h e [EXIT] k ey.

Th e VM200 retu rn s to th e previou s m ode.

Altern atively, press th e [ROUTING/ PHASE] key an d th e

[PAIR/ GROUP] key sim u ltan eou sly to select MMC Sen d m ode

im m ediately after you set th e Fram e Mode param eter.

194

VM200 UserÕs Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Storing Locate Points

Follow th e steps below to store a locate poin t to th e desired Locate

key.

^1.Wh ile t h e MMC SEND fu n ct ion page is displayed, rot at e t h e

[GAIN] rot ary con t rols t o set t h e locat e t im es in h ou rs, m in -

u t es, secon ds, an d fram es.

Th e EQ/ LO GAIN rotary con trol adju sts th e h ou rs (MTC-[h ]).

Th e EQ/ LO-MID GAIN rotary con trol adju sts th e m in u tes

(MTC-[m ]).

Th e EQ/ HI-MID GAIN rotary con trol adju sts th e secon ds (MTC-[s]).

Th e EQ/ HI GAIN rotary con trol th e fram es (MTC-[f]).

LOCATE TIME

LOCATE POINT

2. Press t h e ch an n el 8 [ON] k ey (fu n ct ion in g as t h e STORE k ey),

t h en press an [EQ EDIT] or [SOLO] k ey t o specify wh ere you

wish t o st ore t h e locat e poin t .

Th e VM200 displays th e locate poin t in th e u pper -left of th e dis-

play.

Checking the Locate Points

You can ch eck th e locate poin ts m em orized in to th e Locate keys as

follows:

^3.Wh ile t h e MMC SEND fu n ct ion page is displayed, press t h e ch an -

n el 7 [ON] k ey (fu n ct ion in g as t h e RECALL k ey), t h en press t h e

Locat e k ey for t h e Locat e poin t you wish t o ch eck .

Th e VM200 displays th e locate poin t in th e u pper -left of th e dis-

play.

Transm itting the Locate Com m ands

^4.Press t h e desired [EQ EDIT] or [SOLO] k eys 1 –1 6 (fu n ct ion in g as

Locat e k eys 1 –1 6 ) t o t ran sm it t h e locat e com m an ds t o t h e

recorder.

Note th at you can store Locate poin ts u sin g th e MIDI Bu lk Du m p

fu n ction . See “Bu lk Du m p” on page 189.

VM200 UserÕs Guide

195

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VM200 & MIDI

196

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAX

MIN

CHAPTER 12

Initializing the VM200

EFF2

RECORDING MIXER

ORE

VM200

EFF EDIT

DIGIT

EFF1

EFF LIBRAR

RECALL

ORE

EQ ON

SELECTED EQ

EQ LIBRAR

-18

-24

REC BUSSSOLO

-36

-40

RECALL

ST BUSS/SOLO

About This Chapter

Th is brief ch apter describes h ow to re-in itialize th e VM200 to reset

SOLO

EXIT

EQ/HI

GAIN

all param eters to th eir origin al defau lt valu es.

EQ EDIT

17-20 EFF RTN

FREQ

SOLO

Chapter Contents

EQ EDIT

SOLO

GAIN

EQ/HI-MID

In itializin g th e VM200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

-10

-20

EQ EDIT

ADA

AGE SELECT

-30

9-16

-40

FREQ

SOLO

+10

-60

-10

EQ EDIT

-20

SOLO

+10

-30

GAIN

EQ/LO-MID

-40

-10

EQ EDIT

-20

FREQ

SOLO

+10

-30

-40

-10

EQ EDIT

-20

SOLO

+10

-30

-40

-10

EQ EDIT

-20

SOLO

+10

-30

-40

-10

EQ EDIT

-20

SOLO

+10

-30

-40

-10

-20

+10

-30

-40

AIR/

-10

GROUP

-20

METER

+10

CHANNEL/

-30

-40

MMC SEND

VM200 User’s Guide

197

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Initializing the VM200

You can in itialize th e VM200 to its factory defau lt settin gs by u sin g

th e In itialization fu n ction .

You can specify th e item s you wish to in itialize, ch oosin g from th e fol-

lowin g option s:

❑ ALL (all param eters)

❑ SCENE MEM. (Scen e Mem ory)

❑ EQ LIBRARY

❑ EFF LIBRARY

❑ PGM C. TABLE (Program Ch an ge Table)

❑ CTRL C. TABLE (Con trol Ch an ge Table)

❑ SETUP

Not e: If you wan t to reset on ly th e m ix settin gs an d retain oth er param -

eter settin gs, recall on e of th e preset scen e m em ories P0, P1, or P2

in stead. See th e ch apter en titled “Scen e Mem ory” on page 147 for m ore

in form ation .

Follow th e steps below to in itialize th e VM200.

^1.Press t h e [SYSTEM] k ey repeat edly t o display t h e 6: INITIALIZE

fu n ct ion page.

^2.Rot at e t h e EQ/ LO Gain con t rol t o select t h e desired it em .

Select from th e followin g option s:

• ALL (all param eters)

• SCENE MEM. (Scen e Mem ory)

• EQ LIBRARY

• EFF LIBRARY

• PGM C. TABLE (Program Ch an ge Table)

• CTRL C. TABLE (Con trol Ch an ge Table)

• SETUP

Th e selected item ﬂash es.

198

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Initializing the VM200

^3.Press t h e [ENTER] k ey.

Th e selected item ligh ts u p con tin u ou sly, an d a “YES/ ENTER” dia-

log appears.

^4.Press t h e [ENTER] k ey t o in it ialize t h e speciﬁ ed set t in gs, or

press t h e [EXIT] k ey t o ret u rn t o t h e previou s screen .

If you press th e [ENTER] key, a warn in g m essage appears an d th e

VM200 starts in itializin g its settin gs.

Warn in g: Do n ot power off th e VM200 wh ile it is writin g to th e

ﬂash m em ory or you m ay dam age th e VM200.

VM200 User’s Guide

199

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Initializing the VM200

Default Setup Param eters

System Parameters

Value

CLOCK SEL

MON SEL

INT44

ST-B

SOLO MODE

SOLO KEY

CASCADE

PFL

LATCH

OFF

MOTOR

FRAME MODE

RECALL SAFE

CH. FADER

CH. PAN

CH. ON

ROUTING

AUX1–4

EFF1/2

OFF

EQ ON

Ch1–20

LAST-STORED

OFF

ALL OFF

SOLO SAFE

POWER ON RCL

MIDI Parameters

Value

Tx CH

Rx CH

OMNI

OFF

ECHO

BULK Rx

PG Tx

PG Rx

PG Table

CC Tx

1 (User)

OFF

1 (User)

OFF

CC Rx

CC Table

SySEx Tx&Rx

SysEx DevID

PGM C. TABLE1

CTL C. TABLE1

ITEM

Same as PGM C. TABLE 2(preset)

Same as CTL C. TABLE2 (preset)

ALL

---

BLOCK

INTERVAL

0ms

200

VM200 User’s Guide

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAX

MIN

APPENDIX

Speciﬁcations and Data

EFF2

RECORDING MIXER

ORE

VM200

EFF EDIT

DIGIT

EFF1

EFF LIBRAR

RECALL

ORE

EQ ON

SELECTED EQ

EQ LIBRAR

-18

-24

REC BUSSSOLO

-36

-40

RECALL

ST BUSS/SOLO

Chapter Contents

Display Warn in g Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

SOLO

EXIT

EQ/HI

GAIN

Specification s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Main ten an ce. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

EQ EDIT

Tables & Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

17-20 EFF RTN

FREQ

SOLO

Ch an n el Fader Gain Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Master Fader Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

EQ EDIT

Pan Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

SOLO

GAIN

EQ/HI-MID

Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

-10

EQ Frequ en cy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

-20

EQ EDIT

ADA

AGE SELECT

Program Ch an ge To Scen e Mem ory A s s i gn m en t T a b l es . . . 210

9-16

-40

FREQ

SOLO

+10

Program Ch an ge A s s i gn T a b l e 1 (U s er) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

-60

Program Ch an ge A s s i gn T a b l e 2 (Preset) . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

EQ EDIT

Con trol Ch an ge To Con trol Param eters A s s i gn m en t T a b l es 211

SOLO

+10

-30

GAIN

EQ/LO-MID

Con trol Ch an ge A s s i gn T a b l e 1 (U s er) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

MIDI In / Ou t Data Form at. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Con trol Ch an ge Assign Table 2 (Preset). . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

-10

EQ EDIT

Preset Scen e Param eters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

-20

FREQ

SOLO

+10

-30

-40

MIDI Im plem en tation Ch art . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225